DBS3900 Hardware Description (14) (PDF) - en

DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 14
Date 2014-06-26
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
DBS3900
Hardware Description About This Document
About This Document
Purpose
This document provides reference information for the DBS3900 site planning and deployment.
It describes the application scenarios, components, functional modules, and cables in the
DBS3900.
Product Version
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Product Version
DBS3900 V100R007C00
DBS3900 GSM V100R014C00
DBS3900 WCDMA V200R014C00
DBS3900 LTE V100R005C00
DBS3900 LTE TDD V100R005C00
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Base station installation personnel
l System engineers
l Site maintenance personnel
Organization
1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description
This chapter describes the changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.
Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

DBS3900
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
The DSB3900 consists of the required cabinets, BBU, RRUs, and other components in the
cabinets. This chapter describes various cabinet application scenarios.
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
This chapter describes functional modules in the DBS3900.
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
This chapter describes the exteriors, structures, specifications, and application scenarios of
various DBS3900 cabinets and racks as well as the requirements for equipment in the DBS3900
cabinets.
5 DBS3900 Power System
The DBS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supplies. When
AC power supply or +24 V DC power supply is used, the power supply must be converted to
-48 V DC power for the base station.
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in the
cabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU and
UEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components to
achieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900.
7 DBS3900 Cables
This chapter describes the cable connections in the DBS3900 and BBU3900 cables in various
scenarios.
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

DBS3900
Symbol Description

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal
injury.
Calls attention to important information, best practices and

tips.
NOTE is used to address information not related to personal
injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Courier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

DBS3900
[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format Description
Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving
the pointer.
Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.
Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

DBS3900
Hardware Description Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.....................................................................1
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet......................................................................11
2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply...............................................................................................12
2.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply...............................................................................................42
2.3 Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply..................................................................................................51
2.4 Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply..................................................................................................52
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900.......................................................................................56

3.1 BBU3900......................................................................................................................................................................57
3.1.1 BBU3900...................................................................................................................................................................57
3.1.2 BBU3900 Functions..................................................................................................................................................58
3.1.3 BBU3900 Technical Specifications...........................................................................................................................58
3.1.4 BBU3900 Slot Assignment.......................................................................................................................................58
3.1.5 WMPT.......................................................................................................................................................................86
3.1.6 UMPT........................................................................................................................................................................92
3.1.7 GTMU.....................................................................................................................................................................101
3.1.8 LMPT.......................................................................................................................................................................109
3.1.9 WBBP......................................................................................................................................................................113
3.1.10 LBBP.....................................................................................................................................................................120
3.1.11 FAN.......................................................................................................................................................................129
3.1.12 UPEU.....................................................................................................................................................................131
3.1.13 UEIU......................................................................................................................................................................134
3.1.14 UTRP.....................................................................................................................................................................135
3.1.15 USCU.....................................................................................................................................................................145
3.1.16 UBRI......................................................................................................................................................................148
3.1.17 UCIU.....................................................................................................................................................................150
3.2 RRU............................................................................................................................................................................153
3.3 SLPU..........................................................................................................................................................................153
3.3.1 SLPU.......................................................................................................................................................................153
3.3.2 Slot Assignment Rules for the SLPU......................................................................................................................153
3.3.3 UELP.......................................................................................................................................................................155
Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

DBS3900
3.3.4 UFLP.......................................................................................................................................................................156
3.3.5 USLP2.....................................................................................................................................................................158
3.4 WGRU........................................................................................................................................................................160
3.5 EMUA/EMUB............................................................................................................................................................163
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks..................................................................................................165

4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks Used by the DBS3900 ...........................................................................................166
4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by the DBS3900....................................................................................................168
4.3 Engineering Specifications of Various Cabinets Used by the DBS3900...................................................................220
4.4 Components in DBS3900 Cabinets............................................................................................................................222
4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, and Battery Cabinet.............................................................................................222
4.4.2 Components in the OMB.........................................................................................................................................222
4.4.3 Components in the OMB (Ver.C)............................................................................................................................233
4.4.4 Components in the IMB03......................................................................................................................................244
4.4.5 Components Used for Installation on a Wall or 19-inch Rack................................................................................256
4.5 Engineering Specifications of Internal Equipment.....................................................................................................270
5 DBS3900 Power System............................................................................................................273

5.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables...................................................................275
5.1.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet...........................................275
5.1.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet......................276
5.1.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)..............................................................................282
5.1.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) .............................................................287
5.1.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03, IFS06, 19-inch Rack or Wall.......................................293
5.1.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet ...................................................................295
5.2 Power Distribution Schemes......................................................................................................................................296
5.2.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/APM30H(Ver.A) Cabinet............................................297
5.2.2 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet..............................301
5.2.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)..............................................................................310
5.2.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) .............................................................314
5.2.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03, IFS06, 19-inch Rack or Wall.......................................318
5.2.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet ...................................................................321
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System..................................................................................................326

6.1 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet..................................................328
6.2 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet.................................329
6.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D).................................................................................333
6.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) ................................................................337
6.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03 or IFS06...........................................................................339
6.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet.......................................................................341
6.7 Customized Alarm Input............................................................................................................................................344
7 DBS3900 Cables.........................................................................................................................348
7.1 Cable Connections of the DBS3900...........................................................................................................................349
Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

DBS3900
7.1.1 Power Cable Connections........................................................................................................................................349

7.1.2 Transmission Cable Connections............................................................................................................................386
7.1.3 CPRI Cable Connections.........................................................................................................................................410
7.1.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections....................................................................................................................421
7.1.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections......................................................................................................................452
7.2 BBU3900 Cables........................................................................................................................................................454
7.2.1 List of BBU3900 Cables..........................................................................................................................................454
7.2.2 PGND Cable............................................................................................................................................................457
7.2.3 BBU Power Cable...................................................................................................................................................458
7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable.............................................................................................................................................................460
7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable...................................................................................................................464
7.2.6 FE/GE Cable............................................................................................................................................................465
7.2.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable........................................................................................................................466
7.2.8 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports..........................................................................................467
7.2.9 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports...................................................................................................467
7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable......................................................................................................................................468
7.2.11 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable.........................................................................................................................................469
7.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable...................................................................................................................473
7.2.13 HEUB-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable..................................................................................................................474
7.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable..................................................................................................................474
7.2.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU................................................................................475
7.2.16 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable..............................................................................................................476
7.2.17 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMUA/EMUB..................................................................................................477
7.2.18 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)....................................................................................................478
7.2.19 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)....................................................................................................479
7.2.20 BBU Alarm Cable.................................................................................................................................................480
7.2.21 GPS Clock Signal Cable........................................................................................................................................481
7.2.22 BBU interconnection signal cable.........................................................................................................................482
7.2.23 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations........................................................................................................483
7.2.24 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance....................................................................................................................485
Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

DBS3900
Hardware Description 1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description
1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware

Description
This chapter describes the changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.
14 (2014-06-26)
This is the fourteenth official release.
Compared with issue 13 (2014-02-24), no topic is added to or deleted from this issue.
Compared with issue 13 (2014-02-24), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic Change Description
3.1.6 UMPT Changed the signaling specifications of the

boards in LTE FDD mode.
3.1.8 LMPT
3.1.10 LBBP
13 (2014-02-24)
This is the thirteenth official release.
2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with Added the description of a single DBS3900
AC Power Supply configured with a maximum of 15 RRUs.
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the

APM30H (Ver.D)
Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

DBS3900
12 (2013-11-28)
This is the twelfth official release.
3.1.5 WMPT Changed the description of the TST port.
3.1.6 UMPT
3.1.7 GTMU
3.1.8 LMPT
3.1.14 UTRP Added the UTRPa.
11 (2013-08-23)
This is the eleventh official release.
3.1.10 LBBP Added the LBBPd4 used in LTE TDD

scenarios.
10 (2013-05-27)
This is the tenth official release.
Compared with issue 09 (2013-02-20), this issue does not include any new information.

DBS3900
l 2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with Added description related to an IBBS700T or

AC Power Supply IBBS700D.
l 4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks
Used by the DBS3900
l 4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by
the DBS3900
l 4.3 Engineering Specifications of
Various Cabinets Used by the DBS3900
l 6.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is
Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)
l Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in
the APM30H (Ver.D)
l Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in
the APM30H (Ver.D)
l 3.1.5 WMPT Added specifications of these boards.

l 3.1.6 UMPT
l 3.1.8 LMPT
l 3.1.9 WBBP
l 3.1.10 LBBP
7.2.11 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable Added the principles for classifying and
selecting CPRI fiber optic cables.
Compared with issue 09 (2013-02-20), no information is deleted from this issue.
09 (2013-02-20)
This is the ninth official release.
3.1.6 UMPT Added the description of UMPTb1.
08 (2012-12-30)
This is the eighth official release.

DBS3900
7.2.22 BBU interconnection signal cable Modified the exterior and length of the BBU
interconnection signal cable connecting
WBBPf to WBBPf.
7.2.3 BBU Power Cable Added the description of the cables

complying with British Standards (BS).
07 (2012-11-08)
This is the seventh official release.
Compared with issue 06 (2012-09-15), this issue includes the following new information:
l 3.1.3 BBU3900 Technical Specifications
l DCDU-12B
5.1.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Changed the requirements for the upper-level
Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H circuit breakers and power cables when the
(Ver.C) Cabinet DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC
power supplied and the BBU is installed in
5.1.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed the TMC11H (Ver.C).
in the APM30H (Ver.D)
3.1.6 UMPT Changed the description of indicators on the

UMPT.
2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with All information about the APM30H (Ver.D1)
AC Power Supply and TMC11H (Ver.D1) is deleted.
2.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with

DC Power Supply
4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks Used

by the DBS3900
4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by the

DBS3900
4.3 Engineering Specifications of Various

Cabinets Used by the DBS3900
4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, and

Battery Cabinet

DBS3900
5.1.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed

5.2.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed

6.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in

the APM30H (Ver.D)
Compared with issue 06 (2012-09-15), the following infomation is deleted from this issue:
l Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.D1)
l Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.D1)
06 (2012-09-15)
This is the sixth official release.
l 5.1.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)
l 5.2.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)
l 6.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)
l Power cable connections in the scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H
(Ver.D1)
l Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)
l Monitoring cable connections in the scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H
(Ver.D1)
l Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)
l 4.4.3 Components in the OMB (Ver.C)
l 7.2.16 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable
2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with Added the application scenario of the
AC Power Supply DBS3900 using the APM30H(Ver.D),
TMC11H(Ver.D), and OMB(Ver.C)
2.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with cabinets.
DC Power Supply
Added the exteriors, configurations,
4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks Used engineering specifications, components,
by the DBS3900 configurations of the Upper-Level circuit
breakers and power cables, power
4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by the distribution schemes, monitoring system,
DBS3900 power cable connections, and monitoring
signal cable connections of the BTS3900

DBS3900
4.3 Engineering Specifications of Various using the APM30H(Ver.D), TMC11H

Cabinets Used by the DBS3900 (Ver.D), and OMB(Ver.C) cabinets.
4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, and

Battery Cabinet
5.1.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900

Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C)
5.2.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900

6.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900

Application Scenario of the DBS3900

Application Scenario of the DBS3900

Using the OMB, OMB (Ver.C), IMB03, or
IFS06
7.2.3 BBU Power Cable Added the BBU power cable when the power
device is EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05.
05 (2012-08-05)
This is the fifth official release.
l 4.4.5 Components Used for Installation on a Wall or 19-inch Rack
3.1.10 LBBP Added the information of combined

bandwidths.
3.1.14 UTRP Deleted the UTRPb4 used in LTE mode.
3.1.7 GTMU Added the TRX specifications of the board.
04 (2012-06-29)
This is the fourth official release.

DBS3900
3.1.15 USCU Added the information of the USCUb14 and

the USCUb22.
7.2.3 BBU Power Cable Added the length of the cables.
7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable
7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer

Cable
FE/GE Ethernet Cable
7.2.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable
7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
7.2.11 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable
7.2.20 BBU Alarm Cable
03 (2012-06-20)
This is the third official release.
3.1.9 WBBP Added the description of silkscreens on the

boards.
3.1.10 LBBP
3.1.15 USCU
5.1.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Added the maximum power of the RRUs.
Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H
(Ver.C) Cabinet
02 (2012-04-25)
This is the second official release.

DBS3900
3.1.5 WMPT Changed the description of the indicators on

the boards.
3.1.6 UMPT
3.1.7 GTMU
3.1.8 LMPT
3.1.9 WBBP
3.1.11 FAN
3.1.12 UPEU
3.1.14 UTRP
3.1.15 USCU
3.1.17 UCIU
3.1.10 LBBP
3.1.16 UBRI
01 (2012-03-20)
This is the first official release.
Compared with draft A (2012-02-10), this issue does not include any new information.
Compared with draft A (2012-02-10), this issue includes the following changes:
3.1.10 LBBP Added the cell bandwidth supported by the

LBBPd.
7.2.22 BBU interconnection signal cable Changed the exterior of the inter-BBU signal
cable.
Compared with draft A (2012-02-10), no information is deleted from this issue.
Draft A (2012-02-10)
This is a draft.

DBS3900
Compared with the documents for the MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA NodeB V200R013C00,
GSM BTS V100R013C00, and eNodeB V100R004C00, this issue includes the following new
information:
l Engineering Specifications of the DBS3900
l 4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, and Battery Cabinet
l HEUA
l AC Surge Protection Box
l Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Single-Mode Base Station
l Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Single-Mode Base Station
l Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Co-
Transmission Mode
l Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Co-
Transmission Mode
l Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Separate
Transmission Mode
l Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Separate
Transmission Mode
l Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Triple-Mode Base Station
l Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Triple-Mode Base Station
l 7.1.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections
l 7.2.22 BBU interconnection signal cable
l 7.2.23 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations
l 7.2.24 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance
l 3.2 RRU
l 3.1.6 UMPT
l Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet
l Configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in 5.1.6 Application
Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet
l Power distribution scheme in 5.2.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the
TP48600A Cabinet
l Monitoring scheme in 6.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A
Cabinet
l Power cable connections in Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the TP48600A
l Monitoring signal cable connections in Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the
TP48600A Cabinet
Compared with the issues for the MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA NodeB V200R013C00,
GSM BTS V100R013C00, and eNodeB V100R004C00, this issue includes the following
changes:
Exteriors of DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks Added the exteriors of the OMB, IMB03, and
IFS06.

DBS3900
3.1.9 WBBP Added the description of the WBBPf.
3.1.10 LBBP Added the description of the LBBPd.
3.1.15 USCU Changed the names of the USCUb11,

USCUb12, and USCUb21.
3.1.4 BBU3900 Slot Assignment Added the slot assignment rules for the
boards in BBU0 and BBU1 in the GU+UL
(BBUs cascaded) scenario.
CPRI Cable Connections in the UMTS Added the CPRI cable connections in the
+LTE Base Station CPRI MUX topology.
Configurations of Cabinets Used by the Added the configurations of the TP48600A

DBS3900 cabinet.
6.7 Customized Alarm Input Added the customized alarm input when the
DBS3900 uses the TP48600A cabinet.
Compared with the documents for the MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA NodeB V200R013C00,
GSM BTS V100R013C00, and eNodeB V100R004C00, no information is deleted from this
issue.

DBS3900
Hardware Description 2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900

Cabinet
About This Chapter
The DSB3900 consists of the required cabinets, BBU, RRUs, and other components in the
cabinets. This chapter describes various cabinet application scenarios.
2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply

This section describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 is
supplied with AC power.
2.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply

supplied with DC power.
2.3 Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply

This section describes the scenario where the BBU in the DBS3900 is installed indoors with AC
power supply.
2.4 Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply

This section describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 is

DBS3900
2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply

supplied with AC power.
Table 2-1 lists the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 is supplied
with AC power.
Table 2-1 Installation scenarios
BBU Installation Position Scenario Description Remarks
APM30H (Ver.C) The BBU is installed in an The same configuration

APM30H (Ver.C) and the principles are used for the
RRUs are installed remotely. DBS3900 of which the BBU
The APM30H (Ver.C) is installed in an APM30H
supplies power to the BBU (Ver.B) and the DBS3900 of
and RRUs. which the BBU is installed in
an APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet.
APM30H (Ver.B) The BBU is installed in an For details, see BBU
APM30H (Ver.B) and RRUs Installed in an APM30H
are installed remotely. The (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)
APM30H (Ver.B) supplies Cabinet, which uses an
power to the BBU and RRUs. APM30H (Ver.C) as an
example.
APM30H (Ver.D) BBU 0 is installed in an BBU Installed in an

APM30H (Ver.D), BBU 1 is APM30H (Ver.D) or
installed in an APM30H TMC11H (Ver.D)
(Ver.D) or TMC11H
(Ver.D), and RRUs are
installed remotely. The
APM30H (Ver.D) or
TMC11H (Ver.D) supplies
power to the BBU, and the
APM30H (Ver.D) supplies
power to RRUs.
APM30H (Ver.A) The BBU is installed in an The same configuration

APM30H (Ver.A) and RRUs principles are used for the
are installed remotely. The DBS3900 of which the BBU
APM30H (Ver.A) supplies is installed in an APM30H
power to the BBU and RRUs. (Ver.A) and the DBS3900 of
which the BBU is installed in
APM30 The BBU is installed in an an APM30 cabinet. For
APM30 and the RRUs are details, see Scenario Where
installed remotely. The the BBU Is Installed in an
APM30 supplies power to the APM30H (Ver.A)/APM30,
BBU and RRUs. which uses an APM30H
(Ver.A) as an example.

DBS3900
TP48600A The BBU is installed in a BBU Installed in a

TP48600A and the RRUs are TP48600A Cabinet
installed remotely. The
TP48600A supplies power to
the BBU and RRUs.
OMB The BBU is installed in an BBU Installed in an OMB

OMB and the RRUs are
installed remotely. The OMB
supplies power to the BBU
and RRUs.
OMB (Ver.C) The BBU is installed in an BBU Installed in an OMB

OMB (Ver.C) and the RRUs (Ver.C)
are installed remotely. The
OMB (Ver.C) supplies
power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet

NOTE
APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) are referred to as APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.B) and TMC11H
(Ver.C)are referred to as TMC11H.
The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an APM30H
cabinet are as follows:
l A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs.
l An APM30H cabinet can supply power to a maximum of six RRUs.
l An APM30H supports only one TMC11H and a maximum of two IBBS200Ds or
IBBS200Ts.
l A maximum of 6 RRU power cables and 12 dual-wire fiber optic cables can be routed out
from an APM30H.
l An APM30H or TMC11H cabinet can be installed on the ground or stacked on an
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
l An IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same type or be stacked
under a TMC11H.
l During base station deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right, and auxiliary
cabinets such as the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are positioned on the left. If
both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is
positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on
the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
l During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the
future. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain in
the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. If space
is insufficient, new cabinets can be added to the left side of original cabinets in the reverse
way of the base station deployment scenario.

DBS3900
A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in
the APM30H cabinet. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APM30Hs are required. The
BBU is installed in the basic APM30H, which is on the left side.
Table 2-2 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with
different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Power Backup Space for Carrier Cabinet Configuration

Supply Power Customer Configurati
Capacit Equipment on
y
110 V AC or No ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H

220 V AC backup
power ≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H + 1 TMC11H
≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs
≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs + 1 TMC11H
The ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H + 1 IBBS200D/

number IBBS200T
of
IBBS200 ≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H + 1 TMC11H + 1
Ds or IBBS200D/IBBS200T
IBBS200 ≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs + 2 IBBS200Ds/
Ts is the IBBS200Ts
same as
that of ≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs + 1 TMC11H + 2
APM30H IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
s in the
initial
configura
tion
The ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H + 2 IBBS200Ds/

number IBBS200Ts
of
IBBS200 ≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H + 1 TMC11H + 2
Ds or IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
IBBS200 ≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs + 4 IBBS200Ds/
Ts is two IBBS200Ts
times that
of ≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs + 1 TMC11H + 4
APM30H IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
s in the
initial
configura
tion

DBS3900
When no backup power is required in a site, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode
base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier
configurations are shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station without backup power
When the number of storage battery cabinets are the same as the number of APM30Hs in the
initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base
station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations
are shown in Figure 2-2.

DBS3900
Figure 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the number
of storage battery cabinets is the same as that of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
When the number of storage battery cabinets is two times that of APM30Hs in the initial
configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in
the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown
in Figure 2-3.

DBS3900
of storage battery cabinets is two times that of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installed in the main
APM30H, which is on the left side. BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H, which is on
the right side.
Table 2-3 describes the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different
backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-3 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
Power Supply Backup Space for Carrier Cabinet

Power Customer Configura Configuration
Capacity Equipment tion
110 V AC or No backup ≤ 10 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs

220 V AC power

DBS3900

Power Customer Configura Configuration
Capacity Equipment tion
≤ 21 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs + 1
TMC11H
The number ≤ 10 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs + 2

of IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
IBBS200Ds
or ≤ 21 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs + 1
IBBS200Ts TMC11H + 2
is the same as IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
that of
APM30Hs in
the initial
configuration
The number ≤ 10 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs + 4

of IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
IBBS200Ds
or ≤ 21 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs + 1
IBBS200Ts TMC11H + 4
is two times IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
that of
APM30Hs in
the initial
configuration
When no backup power is required in a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base
station in the case of different space required for customer equipment are shown in Figure
2-4.

DBS3900
Figure 2-4 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station without backup power
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as that of APM30Hs in the initial
configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of
different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure
2-5.

DBS3900
Figure 2-5 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when the number of IBBS200Ds
or IBBS200Ts is the same as that of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is two times that of APM30Hs in the initial
configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of
different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure
2-6.

DBS3900
Figure 2-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when the number of IBBS200Ds
or IBBS200Ts is two times that of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D)

NOTE
APM30H (Ver.D) is shortened to APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.D) is shortened to TMC11H.
The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an APM30H
l An APM30H cabinet can supply power to a maximum of 15 RRUs.
l An APM30H supports only one TMC11H cabinet and a maximum of two IBBS200Ds or
IBBS200Ts.
l A maximum of 15 RRU power cables and 30 dual-wire fiber optic cables can be routed out
from an APM30H.
l An APM30H or TMC11H cabinet can be installed on the ground or stacked on an
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

DBS3900
l An IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same type or be stacked
under a TMC11H.
l During base station deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right side, and
auxiliary cabinets such as the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are positioned on
the left side. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery
cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is
stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
future. Unless otherwise stated, the original cabinets remain in the original positions and
new cabinets are added to the right side of original cabinets during capacity expansion.
When a base station is configured with 7 to 15 RRUs, another DCDU-12B must be added to the
APM30H.
the APM30H.
When no backup power is required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode
base station with different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier
configurations are shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-7 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station without backup power
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the
station with different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier

DBS3900
of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs during base station
deployment
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is twice the number of APM30Hs in the initial
configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station
with different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations
are shown in the following figure.

DBS3900
of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is twice the number of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
station with different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier

DBS3900
of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs during base station
deployment
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
with different requirements of backup power capacities, space required for customer equipment,
and carrier configurations.
Power Backup Space Carrier Cabinet Configuration

Supply Power for Configur
Capacity Custom ation
er
Equipm
ent
110 V AC or No backup ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H

220 V AC power.
≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H + 1 TMC11H

DBS3900

er
Equipm
ent
≤4U ≤ 12 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

RRUs
≤4U ≤ 15 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) + 1

RRUs ODM + 1 OFD
≤ 15 U ≤ 12 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) + 1

RRUs TMC11H

RRUs ODM + 1 OFD + 1 TMC11H
The number ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H + 1 IBBS200D/

of IBBS200T
IBBS200D
s or ≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H + 1 TMC11H + 1
IBBS200Ts IBBS200D/IBBS200T
is the same ≤4U ≤ 12 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) + 1
as the RRUs IBBS200D/IBBS200T
number of
APM30Hs ≤4U ≤ 15 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) + 1
in the initial RRUs ODM + 1 OFD + 1 IBBS200D/
configurati IBBS200T
on.
RRUs TMC11H + 1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T

RRUs ODM + 1 OFD + 1 TMC11H + 1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l The ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs l 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/

number IBBS200Ts
of l 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/
IBBS20 IBBS700T
0Ds or
IBBS20 ≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs l 1 APM30H + 1 TMC11H + 2
0Ts is IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
twice l 1 APM30H + 1 TMC11H + 1
the IBBS700D/IBBS700T
number
of ≤4U ≤ 12 l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
APM30 RRUs + 2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Hs in the l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
+ 1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T

DBS3900

er
Equipm
ent
initial ≤4U ≤ 15 l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

configur RRUs + 1 ODM + 1 OFD + 2
ation. IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
l The l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
number + 1 ODM + 1 OFD + 1
of IBBS700D/IBBS700T
IBBS70
0Ds or ≤ 15 U ≤ 12 l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
IBBS70 RRUs + 1 TMC11H + 2 IBBS200Ds/
0Ts is IBBS200Ts
the l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
same as + 1 TMC11H + 1 IBBS700D/
the IBBS700T
number
≤ 15 U ≤ 15 l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
of
RRUs + 1 ODM + 1 OFD + 1
APM30
TMC11H + 2 IBBS200Ds/
Hs
IBBS200Ts
during
base l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
station + 1 ODM + 1 OFD + 1
deploy TMC11H + 1 IBBS700D/
ment. IBBS700T
NOTE
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the initial site
construction, and the site is configured with more than six RRUs, the IBBS200D or IBBS200T must be
configured with at least two battery packs consisting of 92 Ah storage batteries to avoid overcurrent of a
single battery pack during the discharging.
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. The BBUs are installed as follows:
l When two BBUs are configured in the initial site construction, the BBUs are installed in
an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
l During capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the BBU
is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
When a triple-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, the BBU is installed in the
position of BBU0 in the following figure.
When no backup power is required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base
station with different requirements of space required for customer equipment are shown in the
following figure. Illustrations a and b in the following figure show the scenarios of new site
deployment, and illustration c shows the scenarios of capacity expansion.

DBS3900
Figure 2-11 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station without backup power
initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with
different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are
shown in the following figure. Illustrations a and b in the following figure show the scenarios
of new site deployment, and illustration c shows the scenarios of capacity expansion.

DBS3900
of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is twice the number of APM30Hs in the initial
configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different
requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in
the following figure. Illustrations a and b in the following figure show the scenarios of new site
deployment, and illustration c shows the scenarios of capacity expansion.

DBS3900
of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is twice the number of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with
different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are
shown in the following figure.

DBS3900
of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with
different requirements of backup power capacities, space required for customer equipment, and
carrier configurations.

Supply Power Custome Configur
Capacity r ation
Equipme
nt
110 V AC or No backup ≤2U ≤ 12 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

220 V AC power. RRUs
≤2U ≤ 15 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +

RRUs 1 ODM + 1 OFD

DBS3900

Capacity r ation
Equipme
nt
≤ 13 U ≤ 12 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +

RRUs 1 TMC11H

RRUs 1 ODM + 1 OFD + 1 TMC11H
The number of ≤2U ≤ 12 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +

IBBS200Ds RRUs 1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
or IBBS200Ts
is the same as ≤2U ≤ 15 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +
the number of RRUs 1 ODM + 1 OFD + 1 IBBS200D/
APM30Hs in IBBS200T
the initial ≤ 13 U ≤ 12 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +
configuration. RRUs 1 TMC11H + 1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T

RRUs 1 ODM + 1 OFD + 1 TMC11H +
1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l The ≤2U ≤ 12 l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

number of RRUs + 2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
IBBS200 l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
Ds or + 1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
IBBS200T
s is twice ≤2U ≤ 15 l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
the RRUs + 1 ODM + 1 OFD + 2
number of IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
APM30Hs l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
in the + 1 ODM + 1 OFD + 1
initial IBBS700D/IBBS700T
configurati
on. ≤ 13 U ≤ 12 l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
l The RRUs + 1 TMC11H + 2
number of IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
IBBS700 l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
Ds or + 1 TMC11H + 1 IBBS700D/
IBBS700T IBBS700T
s is the
same as
the
number of
APM30Hs
in the
initial

DBS3900

Capacity r ation
Equipme
nt
configurati ≤ 13 U ≤ 15 l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
on. RRUs + 1 ODM + 1 OFD + 1
TMC11H + 2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
+ 1 ODM + 1 OFD + 1
TMC11H + 1 IBBS700D/
IBBS700T
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.A)/APM30

NOTE
l In this section, the APM is APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A).

l The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured in a single- or dual-mode scenario.
l A single APM can provide power to a maximum of six RRUs.
l A single APM can be installed together with only one TMC and a maximum of one
integrated battery backup system with TEC (IBBS200T). TEC is short for thermoelectric
cooling unit.
l A maximum of six power cables and twelve dual-wire fiber optic cables can be led out
from a single APM.
l An APM or TMC can be installed on the floor or stacked on a battery cabinet.
l A BBC or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same type or be stacked below
a TMC. BBC is short for battery backup cabinet. The BBC or IBBS200T is stacked below
the TMC.
l During base station deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right and auxiliary
cabinets such as the battery cabinet and TMC, if required, are positioned on the left. If both
the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned
on the left of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet
or positioned on the left of the battery cabinet.
the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. In a
special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverse
the APM. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APMs are required. The BBU is installed in
the basic APM, which is on the left.

DBS3900

Power Customer Configuration Configuration
Capacity Equipment
110 V AC or No backup ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM

220 V AC power
≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM+1 TMC
≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APMs
≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APMs+1
TMC
0.5 h or 2 h ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM+1 BBC/

IBBS
≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM+1 BBC/

IBBS+1 TMC
≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APMs+2
BBCs/IBBSs
≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APMs+2
BBCs/IBBSs+1
TMC
In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet
configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipment
and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-15.
Figure 2-15 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power
is not required

DBS3900
When 0.5 h or 2 h backup power is required, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode
base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown
in Figure 2-16.
Figure 2-16 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when 0.5 h or 2 h
backup power is required
BBU Installed in a TP48600A Cabinet

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TP48600A
l A TP48600A cabinet can be installed together with a TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet side by
side.
l A TP48600A cabinet can be installed together with an IBBS700D/IBBS700T cabinet side
by side.
l A TP48600A can supply power to a maximum of 12 RRUs.
In a single- or dual-mode base station, one BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the direct
current distribution unit-11C (DCDU-11C) in the equipment compartment. Table 2-7 lists the
cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements for
backup power, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.

DBS3900

Supply Power Customer Configura
Capacity Equipmen tion
t
110 V AC or No storage ≤5U ≤ 12 1 TP48600A

220 V AC battery RRUs
cabinet is
configured ≤ 16 U ≤ 12 1 TP48600A + 1 TMC11H
in the initial RRUs (Ver.C)
configuratio
n
The number ≤5U ≤ 12 1 TP48600A + 1 IBBS700T/

of RRUs IBBS700D
IBBS700Ds
or ≤ 16 U ≤ 12 1 TP48600A + 1 IBBS700T/
IBBS700Ts RRUs IBBS700D + 1 TMC11H
is the same (Ver.C)
as that of
TP48600As
in the initial
configuratio
n
When no storage battery cabinet is configured in the initial configuration, the cabinet
configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for
customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-17.

DBS3900
Figure 2-17 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no storage
battery cabinet is configured in the initial configuration
When the number of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as that of TP48600As in the initial
configuration, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of
different space required for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-18.

DBS3900
of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as that of TP48600As in the initial configuration
In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are required. BBU 0 is installed in the 2 U space under
the DCDU-11C in the equipment compartment, and BBU 1 is installed in the 2 U space under
BBU 0. Table 2-8 lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different
requirements for backup power, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.

t
110 V AC or No storage ≤5U ≤ 12 1 TP48600A

220 V AC battery RRUs
cabinet is

DBS3900

t
configured ≤ 16 U ≤ 12 1 TP48600A + 1 TMC11H

in the initial RRUs (Ver.C)
configuratio
n
The number ≤5U ≤ 12 1 TP48600A + 1 IBBS700T/

of RRUs IBBS700D
IBBS700Ds
or ≤ 16 U ≤ 12 1 TP48600A + 1 IBBS700T/
IBBS700Ts RRUs IBBS700D + 1 TMC11H
is the same (Ver.C)
as that of
TP48600As
in the initial
configuratio
n
When no storage battery cabinet is configured in the initial configuration, the cabinet
configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer
equipment are shown in Figure 2-19.

DBS3900
Figure 2-19 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with backup power of 48 V
and 300 Ah
When the number of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as that of TP48600As in the initial
configuration, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of different
space required for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-20.

DBS3900
Figure 2-20 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when the number of
IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as that of TP48600As in the initial configuration
BBU Installed in an OMB

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB are as
follows:
l An OMB supplies power to an RRU.
l An RRU can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, U-steel, or other objects.
The cabinet configuration for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB is shown
in Figure 2-21.

DBS3900
Figure 2-21 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB
BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
are as follows:
l An OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to a BBU and a maximum of six RRUs.
The cabinet configuration for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
is shown in Figure 2-22.
(Ver.C)
2.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply


DBS3900
Table 2-9 lists the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 is supplied
with DC power.
TMC11H (Ver.C) The BBU is installed in a The same installation method

TMC11H (Ver.C) and RRUs is used for the DBS3900 of
are installed remotely. The which the BBU is installed in
TMC11H (Ver.C) supplies a TMC11H (Ver.B) and the
power to the BBU and RRUs. DBS3900 of which the BBU
is installed in a TMC11H
TMC11H (Ver.B) The BBU is installed in a (Ver.C). For details, see BBU
TMC11H (Ver.B) and RRUs Installed in a TMC11H
are installed remotely. The (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)
TMC11H (Ver.B) supplies Cabinet, which uses a
power to the BBU and RRUs. TMC11H (Ver.C) as an
example.
TMC11H (Ver.D) The BBU is installed in a BBU Installed in a

TMC11H (Ver.D) and RRUs TMC11H (Ver.D)
TMC11H (Ver.D) supplies
TMC11H (Ver.A) The BBU is installed in a The same configuration

TMC11H (Ver.A) and RRUs principles are used for the
are installed remotely. The DBS3900 of which the BBU
TMC11H (Ver.A) supplies is installed in a TMC11H
power to the BBU and RRUs. (Ver.A) and the DBS3900 of
which the BBU is installed in
TMC The BBU is installed in a a TMC. For details, see
TMC and the RRUs are Scenario Where the BBU Is
installed remotely. The TMC Installed in a TMC11H
supplies power to the BBU (Ver.A)/TMC, which uses a
and RRUs. TMC11H (Ver.A) as an
example.
APM30H (Ver.B) supplied The BBU is installed in an BBU Installed in an

with +24 V DC power APM30H (Ver.B) supplied APM30H (Ver.B) Cabinet
with +24 V DC power and Supplied with +24 V DC
RRUs are installed remotely. Power
The APM30H (Ver.B)
and RRUs.
OMB The BBU is installed in an BBU Installed in an OMB

OMB and the RRUs are
installed remotely. The OMB
and RRUs.

DBS3900
OMB (Ver.C) The BBU is installed in an BBU Installed in an OMB

OMB (Ver.C) and the RRUs (Ver.C)
OMB (Ver.C) supplies
BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C) Cabinet

NOTE
TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C) are referred to as TMC11H.
The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TMC11H cabinet
are as follows:
l A single TMC11H can supply power to a maximum of 12 RRUs.
l A maximum of 12 power cables and 24 dual-wire optical cables can be led out from a single
TMC11H.
is insufficient, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverse way
of the base station deployment scenario.
the TMC11H cabinet.
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base
station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in
Table 2-10.
Power Space for Carrier Cabinet Configuration

Supply Customer Configuration
Equipment
-48 V DC ≤9U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 TMC11H (with one DCDU)
≤8U ≤ 12 RRUs 1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)
Figure 2-23.

DBS3900
Figure 2-23 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC
scenario
Two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installed
in the main TMC11H cabinet, which is on the left. BBU 1 is installed in the extension TMC11H
cabinet, which is on the right.
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are
shown in Table 2-11.
Power Supply Space for Carrier Cabinet Configuration

Customer Configuration
Equipment
-48 V DC ≤ 18 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 TMC11Hs
shown in Figure 2-24.
Figure 2-24 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario

DBS3900
BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D)

NOTE
TMC11H (Ver.D) is referred to as TMC11H.
The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TMC11H cabinet
are as follows:
l A single TMC11H can supply power to a maximum of 12 RRUs.
TMC11H.
is insufficient, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverse way
of the base station deployment scenario.
the TMC11H cabinet.
Table 2-12.
Power Space for Carrier Cabinet Configuration

Supply Customer Configuration
Equipment
-48 V DC ≤9U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 TMC11H (with one DCDU)
≤8U ≤ 12 RRUs 1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)
Figure 2-25.
scenario

DBS3900
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, and the BBUs are installed as follows:
l In the initial deployment scenario, two BBUs are configured. The BBUs are installed in a
TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input) and transmission equipment is
installed in a TMC11H (only provide transmission space).
l In the capacity expansion scenario, if there is space for a second BBU in the TMC11H, the
BBU is installed in the TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input).
Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (only provide transmission space).
shown in Table 2-13.

Customer Configuration
Equipment
-48 V DC ≤6U ≤ 12 RRUs 1 TMC11H (with two

DCDUs)
≤ 17 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 TMC11Hs (with two

DCDUs)
shown in Figure 2-26. In Figure 2-26, illustrations a and b show the site deployment scenario
and illustration c shows the capacity expansion scenario, respectively.
Figure 2-26 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario

DBS3900
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.A)/TMC

NOTE
In this section, the TMC is TMC or TMC11H (Ver. A).
l A single TMC can provide power to a maximum of 12 RRUs.
TMC.
the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. In a
special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverse
the TMC. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two TMCs are required. The BBU is installed in
the basic TMC, which is on the left.

Power Customer Configuration Configuration
Capacity Equipment
-48 V DC - ≤9U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 TMC (with

one DCDU)
≤8U ≤ 12 RRUs 1 TMC (with

two DCDUs)
Figure 2-27.
scenario

DBS3900
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) Cabinet Supplied with +24 V DC Power

When the BBU of a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) cabinet supplied with +24 V
DC power, this APM30H (Ver.B) cabinet supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs.
Table 2-15 lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied with
+24 V DC power.

Customer Configurati
Equipment on
+24 V DC ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V)
Figure 2-28 shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied
with +24 V DC power.
Figure 2-28 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the +24 V DC
scenario
Table 2-16 lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied with
+24 V DC power.

Customer Configurati
Equipment on
+24 V DC ≤ 10 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B, +24 V)
When +24 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are

DBS3900
Figure 2-29 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the +24 V DC scenario
BBU Installed in an OMB

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB are as
follows:
l An OMB supplies power to a BBU and a maximum of three RRUs.
The cabinet configuration for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB is shown
in Figure 2-30.
BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
are as follows:
l An OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to a BBU and a maximum of six RRUs.
The cabinet configuration for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
is shown in Figure 2-31.

DBS3900
(Ver.C)
2.3 Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply

This section describes the scenario where the BBU in the DBS3900 is installed indoors with AC
power supply.
Table 2-17 lists the scenarios where the BBU in the DBS3900 is installed indoors with AC
power supply.
BBU Scenario Description Reference

Installation
Position
IMB03 The BBU is installed in an IMB03 BBU Installed in an IMB03

and the RRUs are installed remotely.
The IMB03 supplies power to the
BBU and RRUs.
IFS06 The BBU is installed in an IMB03. For details, see the DBS3900 (ICR)
The IMB03 and RRUs are installed Installation Guide.
in an IFS06.
BBU Installed in an IMB03

When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is provided, a BBU can be installed in an IMB03 and an
RRU can be remotely installed. In this scenario, the IMB03 supplies power to the BBU and
RRU, as shown in Figure 2-32.

DBS3900
Figure 2-32 BBU installed in an IMB03
2.4 Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply

This section describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 is
Table 2-18 lists the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 is supplied
with DC power.

Installation
Position
19-inch rack The BBU and the DCDU-03B or BBU Installed in a 19-Inch Rack
DCDU-11B are installed in a 19-inch
rack, and the RRUs are remotely
installed outdoors. The DCDU-03B
or DCDU-11B supplies power to the
BBU and outdoor RRUs.
Wall The BBU and DCDU-03B or BBU installed on a wall

DCDU-11B are installed on a wall,
and the RRUs are remotely installed
outdoors. The DCDU-03B or
DCDU-11B supplies power to the
BBU and outdoor RRUs.

DBS3900

Installation
Position
Indoor The BBU is installed indoors. RRUs BBU Installed Indoors and RRUs
are remotely installed outdoors. The Installed Outdoors (Powered by
APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H an APM30H)
(Ver.C), or APM30H (Ver.D)
supplies power only to the RRUs and
monitors only the RRUs.
IMB03 The BBU is installed in an IMB03 BBU installed in an IMB03

and the RRUs are installed remotely
outdoors. The IMB03 supplies
IFS06 The BBU is installed in an IMB03. For details, see the DBS3900 (ICR)
The IMB03 and RRUs are installed Installation Guide.
in an IFS06.
BBU Installed in a 19-Inch Rack

When -48 V DC power is provided, the BBU and the DCDU-03B or DCDU-11B can be installed
in a 19-inch rack, and RRUs can be remotely installed outdoors. In this scenario, the DCDU-03B
or DCDU-11B supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
Figure 2-33 lists the configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station.
Figure 2-33 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Figure 2-34 shows the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station.

DBS3900
Figure 2-34 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
BBU installed on a wall

When -48 V DC power is provided, the BBU and the DCDU-03B or DCDU-11B can be installed
indoors on a wall, and RRUs can be remotely installed outdoors. In this scenario, the DCDU-03B
or DCDU-11B supplies power to the BBU and RRUs, as shown in Figure 2-35.
Figure 2-35 BBU installed on a wall
BBU Installed Indoors and RRUs Installed Outdoors (Powered by an APM30H)

When the BBU is installed indoors and supplied with -48 V DC power, RRUs can be installed
outdoors and supplied with power and monitored by an APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C),
APM30H (Ver.D). The APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), or APM30H (Ver.D) can be
supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power. Figure 2-36 shows the installation scenarios.

DBS3900
Figure 2-36 BBU installed indoors and RRUs installed outdoors
BBU installed in an IMB03

When -48 V DC power is supplied, the BBU can be installed in an IMB03, which supplies power
to the BBU as well as six RRUs installed outdoors, as shown in Figure 2-37.
Figure 2-37 BBU installed in an IMB03

DBS3900
Hardware Description 3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
About This Chapter
This chapter describes functional modules in the DBS3900.
3.1 BBU3900
This section presents the exterior of the BBU3900 and describes the boards in the BBU3900 and
their panels, functions, indicators, ports, and engineering specifications.
3.2 RRU
The Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antenna
system.
3.3 SLPU
The signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP,
UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection.
3.4 WGRU
The WCDMA GPS receiving unit (WGRU) receives and processes the positioning information
and clock synchronization signals to provide clock reference for the base station. The clock
signals together with the positioning information can be converted into PPS signals and A-GPS
positioning information. The WGRU is optional and is installed in a dedicated case. Each base
station can be configured with a WGRU.
3.5 EMUA/EMUB
The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA/EMUB) monitors the internal environment of the
cabinet and reports related alarms.

DBS3900
3.1 BBU3900
This section presents the exterior of the BBU3900 and describes the boards in the BBU3900 and
their panels, functions, indicators, ports, and engineering specifications.
3.1.1 BBU3900
The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high.
The dimensions of the BBU3900 are 86 mm x 442 mm x 310 mm (3.39 in. x 17.4 in. x 12.2 in.)
(H x W x D), as shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 BBU3900
The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is a unique identifier of a Network Element (NE). It is used
during base station commissioning.
l If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the label and a mounting
ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2 ESN (1)
l If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a mounting ear of
the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-3.

DBS3900
Figure 3-3 ESN (2)
3.1.2 BBU3900 Functions

The BBU3900 is a baseband processing unit. It processes the baseband signals of the base station.
The BBU3900 performs the following functions:

l Provides ports for communication between the base station and the BSC or RNC.
l Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.
l Provides USB(1) ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configuration
data can be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade.
l Provides an OM channel between the base station and the LMT or the M2000 to operate
and maintain the base station.
l Processes uplink and downlink data.
l Manages the entire dual-mode system in terms of OM and signaling processing.
l Provides the system clock.
NOTE
(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning the
base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.
3.1.3 BBU3900 Technical Specifications

This section describes the technical specifications of the BBU, which include capacity,
transmission ports, input power specifications, equipment specifications, environment
specifications, and surge protection specifications.
For details about technical specifications of a BBU3900, see section "BBU3900 Technical
Specifications" in the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.
3.1.4 BBU3900 Slot Assignment

This section describes the slot assignment principles for BBU boards in the following scenarios:
BBU3900 GSM, BBU3900 UMTS, BBU3900 LTE, BBU3900 GSM+UMTS (GU for short),
BBU3900 GSM+LTE (GL for short), BBU3900 UMTS+LTE (UL for short), BBU3900 GU+L
(BBU not interconnected), BBU3900 GL+U (BBU not interconnected), BBU3900 GU+L
(UCIU+UMPT), BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT), and BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).

DBS3900
Slots in the BBU3900

Slots in the BBU3900 are the same in different scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4 Slots in the BBU3900
BBU3900 GSM
Table 3-1 lists the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM.
Table 3-1 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM
Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number
GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It must be

configured in
slot 6, with both
slots 5 and 6
occupied.
FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It must be

configured in
slot 16.
UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It is referentially

configured in
slot 1.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).

DBS3900

Mandatory Number
UTRP Optional 1 Slot 0 or 4 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -
UCIU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 4 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -
Figure 3-5 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GSM.
Figure 3-5 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GSM
BBU3900 UMTS
Table 3-2 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS.
Table 3-2 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS

Mandatory Number
WMPT/UMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single UMPT

or WMPT is
preferentially
configured in
slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.

DBS3900

Mandatory Number
WBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 It is configured

in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, 2,
4, or 5.
The slot
assignment
principles for
the WBBP
boards are as
follows:
l The WBBPd
or WBBPf is
preferentiall
y configured
in slot 3 or 2.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence
over the
WBBPd in
slot
assignment.
l If five or
more
WBBPs are
required,
ensure that a
WBBP is

DBS3900

Mandatory Number
installed in
each of slots
2 and 3. At
least one of
the WBBPs
in slots 2 and
3 is WBBPd
or WBBPf.
l If both slots
2 and 3 are
occupied by
the WBBPa
or WBBPb
boards,
exchange
boards to
ensure that
the WBBPd
or WBBPf is
configured
in slot 3 or 2.
l If the
WBBPf4 is
installed in
the same
BBU as the
WBBPf1,
WBBPf2,
and
WBBPf3,
the WBBPf4
is
preferentiall
y installed in
slots 2 and 3.

configured in
slot 16.

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

DBS3900

Mandatory Number
UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or A single UTRP

6 is preferentially
configured in
slot 4. If more
UTRPs are
required, the
UTRP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, 1,
or 6.
If several
UTRPs are
configured, the
priority of them
as following:
UTRPc,
UTRP6,
UTRP9,
UTRP2,
UTRP3/UTRP4
USCU Optional 1 Slot 1 or 0 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 1.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).
Figure 3-6 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 UMTS.

DBS3900
Figure 3-6 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 UMTS
BBU3900 LTE
Table 3-3 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE.
Table 3-3 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE

Mandatory Number
LMPT/UMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single LMPT

or UMPT is
preferentially
configured in
slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
LBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 A single LBBP

is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,
4, or 5.
FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configured

only in slot 16.

DBS3900

Mandatory Number

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5 A single USCU

is preferentially
configured in
slot 5. A USCU
that occupies 1
U space is
configured in
slot 5 (with both
slots 5 and 4
occupied).
If slots 4 and 5
are occupied, a
USCU is
preferentially
configured in
slot 1, or a
USCU that uses
a dual-satellite
card is
configured in
slot 1, with both
slots 1 and 0
occupied.
Figure 3-7 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 LTE.
Figure 3-7 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 LTE

DBS3900
BBU3900 GU
Table 3-4 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GU.
Table 3-4 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GU

Mandatory Number
WMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 The WMPT or

UMPT is
configured only
in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configured

only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

DBS3900

Mandatory Number

in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, 2,
or 4.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that a WBBP is
installed in each
of slots 2 and 3.
At least one of
the WBBPs in
slots 2 and 3 is
WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence over
the WBBPd
during slot
assignment.

DBS3900

Mandatory Number

only in slot 16.

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
UMTS mode
during slot
assignment.
USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, or 4 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
Figure 3-8 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GU.
Figure 3-8 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GU
BBU3900 GL
Table 3-5 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GL.

DBS3900
Table 3-5 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GL

Mandatory Number
LMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configured

only in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.

only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,
or 4.

only in slot 16.

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.

DBS3900

Mandatory Number
USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, or 4 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
Figure 3-9 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GL.
Figure 3-9 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GL
BBU3900 UL
Table 3-6 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL.
Table 3-6 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL

Mandatory Number

only in slot 6.
WMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configured

only in slot 7.

DBS3900

Mandatory Number
LBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or A single LBBP

5 is configured
only in slot 2. If
more LBBPs are
required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 2, 1, 0, 4,
or 5.
WBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or A single WBBP

5 is configured
only in slot 3. If
more WBBPs
are required, the
WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 0, 1, 4,
or 5.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
configured only
in slot 3.
The WBBP,
which provides
a maximum of
six CPRI ports,
is configured in
either slot 2 or
slot 3.

only in slot 16.

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

DBS3900

Mandatory Number

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
UMTS mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
Figure 3-10 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 UL.
Figure 3-10 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 UL
BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not Interconnected)

BBU3900 GU describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting the
GU mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not interconnected).
BBU3900 LTE describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting
the LTE mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not interconnected).
BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not Interconnected)

BBU3900 GL describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting the
GL mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not interconnected).

DBS3900
BBU3900 UMTS describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting
the UMTS mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not interconnected).
BBU3900 GU+L (UCIU+UMPT)

Table 3-7 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GU
mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (UCIU+UMPT).
Table 3-7 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0

Mandatory Number

UMPT is
configured only
in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.

only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

DBS3900

Mandatory Number

in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, or
2.
If a WBBPd is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that two WBBPs
are installed in
slots 2 and 3. At
least one of the
two WBBPs is
WBBPd.

only in slot 16.

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

DBS3900

Mandatory Number

preferentially
configured in
slot 0.

preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
UCIU Mandatory 1 Slot 0, Slot 1, The UCIU is

Slot 4, or slot 5 installed in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, or
1.
Table 3-8 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 supporting the LTE
mode.

Mandatory Number
UMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single UMPT

is preferentially
configured in
slot 7.

is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,
4, or 5.

only in slot 16.

DBS3900

Mandatory Number

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5 A single USCU

is preferentially
configured in
slot 5. A USCU
that occupies 1
U space is
configured in
slot 5 (with both
slots 5 and 4
occupied).
If slots 4 and 5
are occupied, a
USCU is
preferentially
configured in
slot 1, or a
USCU that uses
a dual-satellite
card is
configured in
slot 1, with both
slots 1 and 0
occupied.
NOTE
The UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.
BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT)

Table 3-9 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GL
mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT).

DBS3900

Mandatory Number

only in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
The UMPT
must be
configured as
the main control
board in the
UCIU+UMPT
cascading
scenario.

only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).
LBBP Mandatory 4 Slot 0 to slot 3 A single LBBP

is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, or
0.

only in slot 16.

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

DBS3900

Mandatory Number

preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.

preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).

descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, or
1.
Table 3-10 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 supporting the
UMTS mode.

DBS3900

Mandatory Number
UMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single UMPT

is preferentially
configured in
slot 7.

DBS3900

Mandatory Number

in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, 2,
4, or 5.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that a WBBP is
installed in each
of slots 2 and 3.
At least one of
the WBBPs in
slots 2 and 3 is
WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence over
the WBBPd
during slot
assignment.

DBS3900

Mandatory Number

configured in
slot 16.

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or A single UTRP

6 is preferentially
configured in
slot 4. If more
UTRPs are
required, the
UTRP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, 1,
or 6.

preferentially
configured in
slot 1.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).
NOTE
BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT)

Table 3-11 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GU
mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).

DBS3900

Mandatory Number

UMPT is
configured only
in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.

only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

DBS3900

Mandatory Number
WBBP Mandatory 4 Slot 0 to slot 3 It is configured

in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, or
2.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that a WBBP is
installed in each
of slots 2 and 3.
At least one of
the WBBPs in
slots 2 and 3 is
WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence over
the WBBPd
during slot
assignment.

DBS3900

Mandatory Number

only in slot 16.

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
UMTS mode
during slot
assignment.

preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).

descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, or
1.
Table 3-12 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL.

DBS3900
Table 3-12 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL

Mandatory Number
UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 6 It is configured

only in slot 6.
UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configured

only in slot 7.
LBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or A single LBBP

5 is configured
only in slot 2. If
more LBBPs are
required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 2, 1, 0, 4,
or 5.
WBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or A single WBBP

5 is configured
only in slot 3. If
more WBBPs
are required, the
WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 0, 1, 4,
or 5.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
configured only
in slot 3.
The WBBP,
which provides
a maximum of
six CPRI ports,
is configured in
either slot 2 or
slot 3.

only in slot 16.

DBS3900

Mandatory Number

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
UMTS mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
NOTE
3.1.5 WMPT
The WCDMA main processing and transmission unit (WMPT) processes signals for the
BBU3900 and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.
Specifications
Table 3-13 lists the WMPT specifications.
Table 3-13 WMPT specifications
Board Applicable Transmissi Number of Port Full/Half-

Mode on Mode ports Capacity Duplex
WMPT UMTS ATM over 1 Four Full-duplex

E1/T1 or IP channels
over E1/T1

DBS3900

Transmissio 1 10 Mbit/s Full-duplex

n over FE and 100
optical ports Mbit/s

n over FE and 100
electrical Mbit/s
ports
NOTE
For combined signaling specifications of the WMPT, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900 Series
Base Station Technical Description.
Panel
Figure 3-11 shows the panel of the WMPT.
Figure 3-11 WMPT panel
Functions
The WMPT performs the following functions:
l Performs functions such as configuration management, equipment management,

performance monitoring, signaling processing, and active and standby switchover, and
provides OM channel to communicate with the LMT or M2000.
l Provides a reference clock for the system.
l Processes signaling and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.
l Provides USB ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configuration data
can be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade.
l Provides a 4-channel E1/T1 port over ATM or IP.
l Provides an FE electrical port and an FE optical port over IP.
Indicators
Table 3-14 describes the indicators on the WMPT panel.

DBS3900
Table 3-14 Indicators on the WMPT panel
Silkscreen Color Status Description
RUN Green Steady on There is power

supply, but the board
is faulty.
Steady off There is no power

supply, or the board
is faulty.
On for 1s and off for The board is

1s functioning properly.
On for 0.125s and off l Data or software

for 0.125s is being loaded to
the board.
l The board is not
started.
ALM Red Steady on An alarm is

generated, and the
board must be
replaced.
Steady off The board is running

properly.
On for 1s and off for An alarm is

1s generated and you
need to locate the
fault before deciding
whether to replace
the board.
ACT Green Steady on The board serves as

an active board.
Steady off l The board does

not serve as an
active board.
l The board has not
been activated.
l The board is not
providing any
services.
On for 0.125s and off The operation and

for 0.125s maintenance link
(OML) is
disconnected.

DBS3900
On for 1s and off for The board is being

1s tested, such as an
RRU Voltage
Standing Wave Ratio
(VSWR) test through
a USB(2)(3) flash
drive.
In addition to the preceding three indicators, there are six indicators on the board panel, which
indicate the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and commissioning
Ethernet port. The six indicators do not have silkscreen on the WMPT panel, whereas they are
at both sides of the corresponding ports, as shown in Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12 Port status indicators on the WMPT panel
Table 3-15 describes the port status indicators on the WMPT panel.
Table 3-15 Port status indicators
Indicator Color Status Description
FE1 optical port Green (LINK on the Steady on The connection is set
status indicators left side) up successfully.
Steady off No connection is set

up.
Orange (ACT on the Blinking Data is being

right side) transmitted or
received.
Steady off No data is being

transmitted or
received.
FE0 electrical port Green (LINK on the Steady on The connection is set
status indicators left side) up successfully.

DBS3900

up.

received.

transmitted or
received.
ETH port indicators Green (LINK on the Steady on The connection is set
left side) up successfully.

up.

received.

transmitted or
received.
Ports
Table 3-16 describes the ports on the WMPT panel.
Table 3-16 Ports on the WMPT panel
Silkscreen Connector Description
E1/T1 port DB26 female connector E1/T1 port
FE0 RJ45 connector FE electrical port
FE1 SFP female connector FE optical port
GPS SMA connector Reserved
ETH(1) RJ45 connector Local maintenance and

commissioning port
TST(2) USB connector Port for clock signal outputs
USB(3) USB connector USB loading port
RST - Used for resetting the WMPT

DBS3900
NOTE
(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened and
the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port.
(2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base
station configuration.
(3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.
DIP Switch
The WMPT has two DIP switches: SW1 and SW2. SW1 is used to set the work mode of the E1/
T1 signal cable, and SW2 is used to set the resistance of the four E1/T1 signal cables in different
modes. Figure 3-13 shows the DIP switch settings of the WMPT.
Figure 3-13 DIP switch settings of the WMPT
Table 3-17 and Table 3-18 list the DIP switch settings of the WMPT.
Table 3-17 Settings of the DIP switch SW1 on the WMPT
DIP DIP Status Description

Switch
1 2 3 4
SW1 ON ON OFF OFF T1
OFF OFF ON ON The E1

resistance is
set to 120
ohm.
ON ON ON ON The E1
resistance is
set to 75 ohm.

DBS3900

Switch
1 2 3 4
Others Unavailable
Table 3-18 Settings of the DIP switch SW2 on the WMPT

Switch
1 2 3 4
SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF Balanced
ON ON ON ON Imbalanced
Others Unavailable
3.1.6 UMPT
The universal main processing and transmission unit (UMPT) processes signals and manages
resources on other boards in the BBU3900.
NOTE
UMPTb1 is supported in NodeB V200R014C00SPC370 and later versions.
Specifications of the UMPT

The UMPT is classified into four types: UMPTa1, UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6. Table
3-19 lists the specifications of the UMPTa1, UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6.
Table 3-19 Specifications of the UMPT

UMPTa1/ UMTS ATM over 1 Four -

UMPTb1 E1/T1 or IP channels
over E1/T1
Transmissio 1 10 Mbit/s, Full-duplex

n over FE/ 100 Mbit/s,
GE electrical or 1000
ports Mbit/s
Transmissio 1 100 Mbit/s or Full- or half-

n over FE/ 1000 Mbit/s duplex
GE optical
ports

DBS3900

UMPTa2/ LTE IP over E1/ 1 Four -

UMPTa6 T1 channels

GE electrical or 1000
ports Mbit/s
Transmissio 1 100 Mbit/s or Full- or half-

n over FE/ 1000 Mbit/s duplex
GE optical
ports
The following table describes the signaling specifications of the UMPTa2, or UMPTa6 working
in LTE mode.
Table 3-20 Signaling specifications
Board Signaling Specifications (BHCA)
UMPTa2/UMPTa6 60000
The following table describes the data radio bearer (DRB) specifications and maximum number
of users supported by the UMPTa2, or UMPTa6 working in LTE mode.
Table 3-21 Data radio bearer specifications
Board Maximum Number of Users
UMPTa2/UMPTa6 10800
The maximum of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by the UMPTa2/UMPTa6 working in
LTE mode is three times the maximum number of UEs in RRC_Connected mode.
NOTE
For signaling specifications of the eNodeB and NodeB, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900
Series Base Station Technical Description. For the maximum number of DRBs and the maximum number
of UEs in RRC connected mode supported by the eNodeB, see section "Baseband Specifications" in 3900
Series Base Station Technical Description.
Panel
Figure 3-14, Figure 3-16, Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-17 show the panels of the UMPT boards.

DBS3900
Figure 3-14 UMPTa1 Panel
Figure 3-15 UMPTb1 Panel
NOTE
In the lower left of the UMPTa1, UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6, there are silkscreens UMPTa1,
UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6, respectively, indicating their board types.
Functions
The UMPT performs the following functions:
l Performs configuration management, device management, performance monitoring,

signaling message processing, and active/standby switchover.
l Controls all boards in the system.
l Provides the reference clock for the entire system.

DBS3900
l Implements transmission and provides absolute time and 1 pulse per second (PPS) reference
clock source while being equipped with a single satellite card.
l Provides four E1 ports and two FE/GE ports to implement basic transmission in compliance
with Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Internet Protocol (IP), and Point-to-Point
Protocol (PPP) during the initial configuration.
Ports
Table 3-22 describes the ports on the UMPT.
Table 3-22 Ports on the UMPT
FE/GE1 SFP female A 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s adaptive Ethernet

connector optical port is used for transmitting service data
and signaling messages.
FE/GE0 RJ45 connector A 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s adaptive

Ethernet electrical port is used for transmitting
service data and signaling messages.
USB(1) USB connector The USB port with the USB silkscreen is used for
the software upgrade of a base station using a USB
flash driver. This port also functions as a
commissioning Ethernet port(2).
The USB port with the CLK silkscreen functions
as follows:
l Receives TOD signals.
l Port for clock signal outputs.
E1/T1 DB26 female The port is used for four E1/T1 signal inputs and
connector outputs between the UMPT and universal E1/T1
lightning protection unit (UELP) or between base
station controllers.
GPS SMA connector The GPS port on the UMPTa1, UMPTb1, or

UMPTa2 is reserved.
The GPS port on the UMPTa6 is used for
transmitting radio frequency (RF) signals
received from the antenna to the satellite card.
CI SFP female The port is used for BBU interconnection.

connector
RST - The port is used to reset the board.

DBS3900
NOTE

(2) When the USB port functions as a commissioning Ethernet port, ensure that an OM port has been opened
and the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port before
accessing the base station through the USB port.
Indicators
Table 3-23 describes the indicators on the UMPT.
Table 3-23 Indicators on the UMPT

is faulty.

is faulty.

On for 0.125s and off l The board is

for 0.125s being loaded or
configured.
l The board is not
started.

generated, and the
board needs to be
replaced.

properly.

1s generated, and you
need to locate the
whether to replace
the board.

an active board.

DBS3900

not serve as an
active board.
l The board has not
been activated.
l The board is not
providing any
services.
On for 0.125s and off The operation and

for 0.125s maintenance link
(OML) is
disconnected.
On for 1s and off for The board is being

1s tested, such as an
RRU Voltage
Standing Wave Ratio
(VSWR) test through
a USB(1) flash drive.
NOTE
Of UMPT boards,
only the UMPTa1 has
this status.
In every 4s, the l All cells

indicator is on for corresponding to
0.125s and off for the subrack that
0.125s (eight times) houses this board
in the first 2s and then are not activated.
off for 2s. l The S1 link is
faulty.
NOTE
Of UMPT boards,
only the UMPTa2 and
UMPTa6 have this
status.
Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators indicate the connection status of
the FE/GE optical port, FE/GE electrical port, interconnection port, and E1/T1 port. The
indicators on the FE/GE optical port, FE/GE electrical port, interconnection port, and E1/T1
port, which have no silkscreen on the boards, are near the corresponding port, as shown in Figure
3-18.

DBS3900
Figure 3-18 Indicators for ports
Table 3-24 describes the indicators.
Table 3-24 Indicators for ports
Indicator/ Color Status Definition

Silkscreen
LINK (silkscreen for Green Steady on The connection is

the optical port) normal.
Steady off The connection is

abnormal.
ACT (silkscreen for Orange Blinking Data is being

the optical port) transmitted.

transmitted.
LINK (silkscreen for Green Steady on The connection is

the electrical port) normal.
Steady off The connection is

abnormal.
ACT (silkscreen for Orange Blinking Data is being

the electrical port) transmitted.

transmitted.
CI Red or green Steady green The interconnection

link is normal.
Steady red An optical module

fails to receive
signals because of
one of the following
reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The optical cable
is broken.

DBS3900

Silkscreen
Blinking red (on for Cables are connected

0.125s and off for in one of following
0.125s) incorrect manners:
l In the UCIU
+UMPT scenario,
the S0 port on the
UCIU is
connected to the
CI port on the
UMPT.
Indicators for the
S0 and CI ports
are blinking.
l The ports are
connected in ring
topology.
Indicators for all
incorrectly
connected ports
are blinking.
Steady off The optical module

cannot be detected.
R0, R1, R2 Red or green - Reserved
L01 Red or green Steady off E1/T1 link 0 and 1 is

not set up, or an LOS
alarm is generated.
Steady green E1/T1 links 0 and 1

are working
properly.
Blinking green (on E1/T1 link 0 is

for 1s and off for 1s) working properly,
but E1/T1 link 1 is
not set up or an LOS
alarm is generated.

for 0.125s and off for working properly,
0.125s) but E1/T1 link 0 is
alarm is generated.
Steady red Alarms are generated

on E1/T1 links 0 and
1.

DBS3900

Silkscreen
Blinking red (on for An alarm is

1s and off for 1s) generated on E1/T1
link 0.

0.125s and off for generated on E1/T1
0.125s) link 1.
L23 Red or green Steady off E1/T1 link 2 and 3 is

not set up, or an LOS
alarm is generated.
Steady green E1/T1 links 2 and 3

are working
properly.

for 1s and off for 1s) working properly,
but E1/T1 link 3 is
alarm is generated.

for 0.125s and off for working properly,
0.125s) but E1/T1 link 2 is
alarm is generated.
Steady red Alarms are generated

on E1/T1 links 2 and
3.

1s and off for 1s) generated on E1/T1
link 2.

0.125s and off for generated on E1/T1
0.125s) link 3.
DIP Switch
Two DIP switches on the UMPT are labeled SW1 and SW2. Figure 3-19 shows the positions
of DIP switches on the UMPT.

DBS3900
Figure 3-19 Positions of DIP switches on the UMPT
Each DIP switch has four bits. The DIP switches have the following functions:
l SW1 is used to select the E1/T1 mode. Table 3-25 describes the DIP switch.
l SW2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission. Table 3-26 describes the
DIP switch.
Table 3-25 DIP switch SW1

Switch
1 2 3 4
SW1 ON ON Reserved Reserved The E1 resistance is set to

75 ohms.
OFF ON The E1 resistance is set to

120 ohms.
ON OFF The T1 resistance is set to

100 ohms.
Table 3-26 DIP switch SW2

Switch
1 2 3 4
ON ON ON ON Unbalanced
3.1.7 GTMU
The GSM transmission and timing and management unit (GTMU) is the basic transmission and
control function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenance port, and
external alarm collection port, monitors the power, controls and manages the entire BTS.

DBS3900
Specifications
The GTMU is classified into two types: GTMU and GTMUb. Table 3-27 lists the transmission
specifications of the GTMU and GTMUb.
Table 3-27 Transmission specifications of the GTMU

Board Supported Transmissi Number of Port Full/Half-
GTMU/ GSM TDM over 1 Four Full-duplex

GTMUb E1/T1 channels

n over FE and 100
optical ports Mbit/s

n over FE and 100
electrical Mbit/s
ports
Table 3-28 lists the TRX specifications of the GTMU and GTMUb.
Table 3-28 TRX specifications of the GTMU

Board Supported Mode Transmission Maximum Carrier
Mode Number
GTMU GSM TDM 72
IP over FE or IP over 36
E1
GTMUb GSM TDM 126
IP over FE 60
IP over E1 48
Panel
Figure 3-20 and Figure 3-21 show the panels of the GTMU and GTMUb.
Figure 3-20 GTMU panel

DBS3900
Figure 3-21 GTMUb panel
Functions
The GTMU performs the following functions:
l Controls, maintains, and operates the base station.

l Supports fault management, configuration management, performance management, and
security management.
l Monitors the fans and power modules.
l Provides and manages the clock of the base station in centralized mode.
l Provides the clock output for test.
l Provides a port for maintenance on the OM system.
l Supports the transmission of four paths of E1 signals and two paths of FE signals.
l Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.
Indicators
Table 3-29 describes the indicators on the GTMU.
Table 3-29 Indicators on the GTMU
RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but the

board is faulty.
Steady off There is no power supply, or the

board is faulty.
On for 1s and off for The board is running properly.

1s
On for 0.125s and off Software is being loaded to the

for 0.125s board.
ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, and the

board must be replaced.

DBS3900
Steady off There is no fault.
On for 1s and off for An alarm is generated and you

1s need to locate the fault before
deciding whether to replace the
board.
ACT Green Steady on The board serves as an active

board.
On for 0.125s and off The OML is disconnected.

for 0.125s
Besides the preceding three indicators, there are some other indicators on the board, indicating
the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, CPRI port, and commissioning
port. They are near the corresponding ports and have no silkscreen. Table 3-30 describes the
indicators.
Table 3-30 Indicators for ports
LIU0 to LIU3 Green Steady on An E1/T1 local alarm

is generated.
On for 1s and off for An E1/T1 remote

1s alarm is generated.
Steady off The link is

functional.
CPRI0 to CPRI5 Red or green Steady green The CPRI link is

functioning properly.

fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

DBS3900
Blinking red (on for The CPRI link is out

1s and off for 1s) of lock because of the
following reasons:
l There is no
mutual lock
between dual-
mode clock
sources.
l There is
mismatched data
rate over CPRI
ports.
Steady off l The optical

module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.
ETH Green (LINK Steady on The connection is set

indicator on the left up successfully.
side)
up.
Orange (ACT Blinking Data is being

indicator on the right transmitted or
side) received.

transmitted or
received.
FE0 Green (LINK Steady on The connection is set

indicator on the left up successfully.
side)
up.
Orange (ACT Blinking Data is being

side) received.

transmitted or
received.
FE1 (on the Green (LINK Steady on The connection is set

GTMUb) indicator on the left up successfully.
side)

DBS3900

up.
Green (ACT Blinking Data is being

side) received.

transmitted or
received.
M_S (on the - - This is the indicator

GTMUb) for the reserved port.
EXT (on the - - This is the indicator

GTMUb) for the reserved port.
Ports
Table 3-31 describes the ports on the GTMU.
Table 3-31 Ports on the GTMU

CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP female Data transmission port interconnected to the RF

connector module. It supports the input and output of optical
and electrical transmission signals.
EXT (on the SFP female Reserved

GTMUb) connector
ETH(1) RJ45 connector Local maintenance and commissioning port
FE0 RJ45 connector Connected to the routers in the equipment room

through FE cables to transmit network
information
FE1 DLC connector Connected to the routers in the equipment room

through fiber optic cables to transmit network
information
TST(2) USB connector Port for clock signal outputs
USB(3) USB connector Used for automatic software upgrade through the
USB flash drive
E1/T1 DB26 female Used for four E1/T1 inputs and outputs between
connector the GTMU and the UELP or between BSCs
RST - Used for resetting the GTMU

DBS3900
NOTE
The following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on the GTMU and GTMUb.
Table 3-32 Specifications of CPRI ports on the GTMU and GTMUb
Board Quantity of CPRI CPRI Port Rate Topology Type

Ports (Gbit/s)
GTMU 6 1.25 Star, chain, and ring

topologies
GTMUb 6 1.25/2.5 Star, chain, and ring

topologies
DIP Switch
On the GTMU, there are five DIP switches, each of which has four bits. DIP switches S1 and
S2 need to be set jointly. The functions of the five DIP switches are as follows:
l S1 is used to select the E1 resistance. Table 3-33 provides details on the DIP switch.
l S2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission cables. Table 3-34 provides
details on the DIP switch.
l S3 is reserved.
l S4 is used to select the E1 bypass. Table 3-35 provides details on the DIP switch.
l S5 is used for timeslot settings when the E1 bypass is selected. Table 3-36 provides details
on the DIP switch.
Table 3-33 Description on S1
DIP DIP Setting Description

Switch
1 2 3 4
S1 ON ON OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to

75 ohm.
OFF ON OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to

120 ohm.
ON OFF OFF OFF The T1 resistance is set to

100 ohm.
Others Unavailable

DBS3900
NOTE
Bits 3 and 4 of S1 should be kept the factory-delivered configuration, without any manual setting on site.
The out-of-factory state should be OFF. If the bits are ON, set them to OFF.

Switch
1 2 3 4
S2 OFF OFF OFF OFF All the bits are set to

OFF by default in all
modes.
ON ON ON ON When error codes are

received over the four
E1 RX links in 75 ohm,
all the bits of S2 must
be set to ON to rectify
the faults on the E1
links.
Others Unavailable

Switch
1 2 3 4
S4 ON ON ON ON Supporting E1 bypass
OFF OFF OFF OFF Not supporting E1

bypass
Others Unavailable

Switch
1 2 3 4
S5 ON ON ON ON Not supporting E1
bypass
OFF ON ON OFF Supporting E1 bypass

of level-1 cascaded
base stations

DBS3900

Switch
1 2 3 4
ON OFF ON OFF Supporting E1 bypass

of level-2 cascaded
base stations
OFF OFF ON OFF Supporting E1 bypass

of level-3 cascaded
BTSs
ON ON OFF OFF Supporting E1 bypass

of level-4 cascaded
BTSs
OFF ON OFF OFF Supporting E1 bypass

of level-5 cascaded
BTSs
3.1.8 LMPT
The LTE main processing and transmission unit (LMPT) manages the entire eNodeB system in
terms of OM and signaling processing and provides system clock for the BBU3900.
Specifications
Table 3-37 lists the specifications of the LMPT.
Table 3-37 Specifications of the LMPT
Board Mode Transmissi Number of Port Full/Half-

on Mode ports Capacity Duplex
LMPT LTE Transmissio 2 10 Mbit/s, Full-duplex

GE optical and 1000
ports Mbit/s

GE electrical and 1000
ports Mbit/s
The following table describes the signaling specifications of the LMPT.

DBS3900
Table 3-38 Signaling specifications of the LMPT
LMPT 40000
The following table lists the maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode supported by
the LMPT.
Table 3-39 Maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode
Board Maximum Number of UEs in RRC

Connected Mode
LMPT 5400
The maximum number of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by an LMPT is three times the
maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode.
NOTE
For signaling specifications of the eNodeB, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900 Series Base
Station Technical Description. For the maximum number of DRBs and the maximum number of UEs in
RRC connected mode supported by the eNodeB, see section "Baseband Specifications" in 3900 Series Base
Station Technical Description.
Panel
Figure 3-22 shows the LMPT.
Figure 3-22 LMPT
Functions
The LMPT performs the following functions:
l Enables configuration management, device management, performance monitoring,

signaling processing, and radio source management
l Controls all boards in the system
l Provides the system clock
l Enables signal exchange between the eNodeB and MME/S-GW

DBS3900
Indicators
There are three indicators on the LMPT panel. Table 3-40 describes the indicators on the LMPT
panel and their status.
Table 3-40 Indicators on the LMPT panel
RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.
Steady off There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.
On for 1s and off The board is functioning

for 1s properly.
On for 0.125s and l Software or data is being

off for 0.125s loaded to the board.
l The board is not started.
ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, and

the board needs to be
replaced.

properly.
On for 1s and off An alarm is generated and

for 1s you need to locate the fault
before deciding whether to
replace the board.
ACT Green Steady on The board serves as an

active board.
Steady off l The board does not

serve as an active board.
l The board has not been
activated.
l The board is not
providing any services.
On for 0.125s and The OML is disconnected.

off for 0.125s
In every 4s, the l All cells corresponding

indicator is on for to the subrack that
0.125s and off for houses this board are not
0.125s (eight activated.
times) in the first l The S1 link is faulty.
2s and then off for
2s.

DBS3900
Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators used for indicating the connection
status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and commissioning Ethernet port have no
silkscreen on the board. They are near the ports. Table 3-41 describes the indicators.
Table 3-41 Indicators
SFP0 and SFP1 Green (LINK) Steady on The connection is set

up successfully.

up.
Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is being

transmitted or
received.

transmitted or
received.
ETH Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is being

transmitted or
received.

transmitted or
received.
Green (LINK) Steady on The connection is set

up successfully.

up.
FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 Green (LINK) Steady on The connection is set

up successfully.

up.
Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is being

transmitted or
received.

transmitted or
received.

DBS3900
Ports
Table 3-42 describes the ports on the panel of the LMPT.
Table 3-42 Ports on the panel of the LMPT
Silkscreen Connector Quantity Description
SFP0 and SFP1 SFP female 2 FE/GE optical port

connector connecting to the
transmission
equipment or gateway
equipment
ETH(1) RJ45 connector 1 Local maintenance and

commissioning port
TST(2) USB connector 1 Port for clock signal

outputs
USB(3) USB connector 1 Software loading
FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 RJ45 connector 2 FE/GE electrical port

connecting to the
transmission
equipment or gateway
equipment
GPS SMA connector 1 GPS port
RST - 1 Used for resetting the

LMPT
NOTE
NOTE
SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not used
simultaneously.
SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they cannot be used
simultaneously.
3.1.9 WBBP
The WCDMA baseband processing unit (WBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.
NOTE
WBBPf is supported in NodeB V200R014C00SPC320 and later versions.

DBS3900
Specifications
The WBBP falls into four types, as listed in Table 3-43.
NOTE
The WBBP in slot 2 or slot 3 could transfer the received CPRI data to other boards.
Table 3-43 WBBP specifications
Board Number Number Number Number Number Number

of Cells of UL of DL of of of
CEs CEs HSDPA HSDPA HSUPA
Codesa UEs UEs
WBBPa 3 128 256 3x15 96 60
WBBPb1 3 64 64 3x15 64 64
WBBPb2 3 128 128 3x15 128 96
WBBPb3 6 256 256 6x15 144 96
WBBPb4 6 384 384 6x15 144 96
WBBPd1 6 64 64 6x15 128 96
192 192
WBBPd2 6 256 256 6x15 144 144
384 384
WBBPd3 6 256 256 6x15 144 96
WBBPf1 6 64 128 6x15 144 144
192 256
WBBPf2 6 256 384 6x15 192 192
WBBPf3 6 256 384 6x15 256 256
384 512
WBBPf4 6 512 768 6x15 384 384
a: The number of HSDPA codes supported by a WBBPd1 is 6x15, where "6" is the number
of cells and "15" is the number of codes supported by each cell.
NOTE
For combined signaling specifications of the WBBP, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900 Series
Base Station Technical Description.

DBS3900
Panel
The WBBP has four types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-23, Figure 3-24, Figure 3-25, and
Figure 3-26.
Figure 3-23 Panel of the WBBPa
Figure 3-24 Panel of the WBBPb
Figure 3-25 Panel of the WBBPd
Figure 3-26 Panel of the WBBPf
NOTE
l The WBBPb1, WBBPb2, WBBPb3, and WBBPb4 have silkscreens WBBPb1, WBBPb2,
WBBPb3, and WBBPb4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel,
respectively.
l The WBBPd1, WBBPd2, and WBBPd3 have silkscreens WBBPd1, WBBPd2, and WBBPd3
indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.
l The WBBPf1, WBBPf2, WBBPf3, and WBBPf4 have silkscreens WBBPf1, WBBPf2, WBBPf3, and
WBBPf4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.

DBS3900
Functions
The WBBP performs the following functions:
l Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules, and supports CPRI ports in 1
+1 backup mode.
l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.
l The WBBPd supports interference cancellation (IC) within the board.
l When the WBBPd is installed in slot 2 or 3 and is connected to an RF module, the WBBPd
supports the IC of uplink data.
l The WBBPf installed in slot 2 or slot 3 supports the baseband interconnection between
BBUs.
Indicators
There are three indicators on the panel of the WBBP. Table 3-44 describes the indicators on the
WBBP and their status.
Table 3-44 Indicators on the panel of the WBBP and their status

board is faulty.

board is faulty.
On for 1s and off for 1s The board is functioning

properly.
On for 0.125s and off for l Software or data is being

0.125s loaded to the board.

Steady off The board is running properly.
On for 1s and off for 1s An alarm is generated and you

need to locate the fault before
board.

board.

DBS3900
Steady off l The board does not serve as

an active board.
activated.
l The board is not providing
any services.
On for 1s and off for 1s The power supply for the board
is insufficient.
NOTE
Of all types of WBBP boards, only
the WBBPf has this status.
The WBBPa or WBBPb provides three indicators indicating the status of Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP) links, and the indicators are below the SFP ports. The WBBPd or WBBPf
provides six indicators indicating the status of SFP links, and the indicators are above the SFP
ports.
Table 3-45 describes the indicators.
Table 3-45 CPRI port status indicators
CPRIx Red or green Steady green The CPRI link is


fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.
Blinking red (on for The RF module

0.125s and off for connected to the CPRI
0.125s) link has a hardware
fault.

DBS3900

1s and off for 1s) of lock because of
following reasons:
l There is no mutual
lock between dual-
mode clock
sources.
l There is
mismatched data
rate over CPRI
ports.
l VSWR alarms are
generated on the
RF module
connected to the
CPRI link when
the USB(1) flash
drive is used for
VSWR test.

module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.
NOTE
(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning the
base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.
The WBBPf provides an indicator indicating the status of the Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable
(QSFP) link, and the indicator is above the QSFP port. Table 3-46 describes this indicator.
Table 3-46 QSFP port status indicators
HEI Red or green Steady green The inter-BBU

transmission link is
functional.

DBS3900

fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.
Blinking red (on for The interconnection

1s and off for 1s) link is out of lock
because of the
following reasons:
l There is no
mutual lock
between two
interconnected
BBUs.
l There is
mismatched data
rate over QSFP
ports.

cannot be detected.
Ports
Table 3-47 describes the three CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPa and WBBPb.
Table 3-47 Ports on the WBBPa and WBBPb panels
CPRIx SFP female connector Data transmission port

interconnected to the RF
module. It supports the input
and output of optical and
electrical transmission
signals.
Table 3-48 describes the six CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPd.

DBS3900
Table 3-48 Ports on the WBBPd panel
CPRI0, CPRI1, SFP female connector Data transmission port

CPRI2, CPRI3/ interconnected to the RF module.
EIH0, CPRI4/EIH1, It supports the input and output of
CPRI5/EIH2 optical and electrical
transmission signals.
The WBBPf provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port, as listed in Table 3-49.
Table 3-49 Ports on the WBBPf panel
CPRIx SFP female connector Data transmission port

interconnected to the RF
module. It supports the input
and output of optical and
electrical transmission
signals.
HEI QSFP connector Port interconnected to other

baseband boards to share the
baseband resources.
3.1.10 LBBP
The LTE baseband processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.
Specifications
The following table lists the signaling specifications of the LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios.
Table 3-50 Signaling specifications of the LBBP
LBBPc 40000
LBBPd1, LBBPd2, or LBBPd3 50000

DBS3900
Table 3-51 Signaling specifications of the LBBP
LBBPc 60000
LBBPd1, LBBPd2, or LBBPd3 80000
the LBBP board in LTE FDD scenarios.
Table 3-52 Maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode
Board Cell Bandwidth Maximum Number of UEs in

RRC Connected Mode
LBBPc 1.4 MHz 1008
3 MHz 1800
5 MHz 1800
10 MHz 1800
15 MHz 1800 (in 2R mode) or 1200 (in 4R

mode)
20 MHz 1800 (in 2R mode) or 1200 (in 4R

mode)
LBBPd1 or LBBPd2 1.4 MHz 300
3 MHz 1080
5 MHz 1800
10 MHz 3600
15 MHz 3600
20 MHz 3600
LBBPd3 1.4 MHz 600
3 MHz 2160
5 MHz 3600
10 MHz 3600
15 MHz 3600
20 MHz 3600

DBS3900
the LBBP board in LTE TDD scenarios.
Table 3-53 Maximum Number of UEs in RRC connected mode
Board Cell Bandwidth Maximum Number of

UEs in RRC Connected
Mode
LBBPc 5MHz 1800
10MHz 1800
20MHz 1800(2R)/1200(4R)
LBBPd2 5 MHz 1800
10 MHz 3600
15 MHz 3600
20 MHz 3600
LBBPd4 10 MHz 3600
20 MHz 3600
Table 3-54 Maximum Number of UEs in RRC connected mode
Board Cell Bandwidth Maximum Number of

UEs in RRC Connected
Mode
LBBPd1 10MHz 3600
20MHz 3600
LBBPd3 10 MHz 3600
20 MHz 3600
The maximum number of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by an LBBP is three times the
maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode.
NOTE
For the overall signaling specifications of an eNodeB, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900 Series
Base Station Technical Description. For the data radio bearer (DRB) and maximum number of UEs in
RRC_CONNECTED mode, see section "Baseband Specifications" in 3900 Series Base Station Technical
Description.
The following table lists the maximum throughput of the LBBP.

DBS3900
Table 3-55 Maximum throughput of the LBBP
Board Maximum Throughput
LBBPc l Downlink: 300 Mbit/s

l Uplink: 100 Mbit/s
LBBPd1 l Downlink: 450 Mbit/s


LBBPd3 LTE FDD:

l Downlink: 600 Mbit/s
LTE TDD:
l Downlink: 600 Mbit/s

NOTE
The maximum throughput listed in the preceding table is the hardware capacities supported by the LBBPc
and LBBPd boards in LTE TDD scenarios. The actual uplink and downlink peak throughput depends on
uplink-downlink subframe configurations.
The following table lists the number of cells, bandwidth, and antenna configurations supported
by a single LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios.
Table 3-56 Specifications of the LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios
Board Number of Cell Bandwidth Antenna Configuration

Cell
LBBPc 3 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 3x20 MHz 1T1R

MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz 3x20 MHz 1T2R
3x10 MHz 4T4R
3x20 MHz 2T2R
1x20 MHz 4T4R
LBBPd1 3 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 3x20 MHz 1T1R

3x20 MHz 2T2R

DBS3900

Cell
LBBPd2 3 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 3x20 MHz 1T1R

3x20 MHz 2T2R
3x20 MHz 4T4R
LBBPd3 6 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, and 6x10M 1T1R

10 MHz 6x10M 1T2R
6x10M 2T2R
The following table lists the number of cells, bandwidth, and antenna configurations supported
by a single LBBP in LTE TDD scenarios.
Table 3-57 Specifications of the LBBP in LTE TDD scenarios

Cells
LBBPc 3 5 MHz, 10 MHz, or 20 MHz 1x20 MHz 4T4R

3x10 MHz 2T2R
3x20 MHz 2T2R
3x10 MHz 4T4R
LBBPd2 3 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 3x20 MHz 2T2R

20 MHz 3x20 MHz 4T4R
LBBPd4 3 10 MHz or 20 MHz 3x20 MHz 8T8R
Table 3-58 Specifications of the LBBP in LTE TDD scenarios
Board Number of Cells Cell Bandwidth Antenna

Configuration
LBBPd1 3 10M/20M 3x20M 2T2R
LBBPd3 6 10 MHz or 20 MHz 6x20 MHz 2T2R

3x20 MHz 8T8R

DBS3900
NOTE
l "Antenna Configuration" lists the maximum configurations supported by various types of a baseband
processing board. For example, the LBBPc supports the maximum configuration of 3x10 MHz 4T4R,
and therefore supports any of the following configurations: 3x1.4 MHz 4T4R, 3x3 MHz 4T4R, and
3x5 MHz 4T4R.
l As long as the maximum antenna configuration is not exceeded, different cells support different antenna
configurations. For example, if an LBBPd2 supports the 3x20 MHz 2T2R antenna configuration, the
three cells connected to the LBBPc can use the following antenna configurations: 2T2R, 2T2R, and
1T1R.
l Boards with the same antenna configuration support combinations of different bandwidth as long as
the total bandwidth does not exceed the maximum bandwidth supported by the board. For example, if
an LBBPc supports the 3x20 MHz 2T2R antenna configuration, the three cells connected to the LBBPc
can use any of the following antenna configurations: 1.4 MHz 2T2R, 3 MHz 2T2R, 5 MHz 2T2R, 10
MHz 2T2R, 15 MHz 2T2R, and 20 MHz 2T2R.
l The LBBP supports CPRI convergence when the site is configured with any of the following RF
modules: RRU3221, RRU3240, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3928, RRU3929, LRFUe, MRFUd,
RRU3229, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3642, RRU3832, RRU3838, and RRU3268. The CPRI
convergence of the LBBP must comply with the following principles:
l In LBBPc+LBBPc CPRI convergence mode, the CPRI convergence is allowed only between two
LBBPc boards, and one LBBPc board must be configured in slot 2 or 3.
l In LBBPc+LBBPc CPRI convergence mode, the CPRI convergence is allowed only from multiple
LBBPc boards to one LBBPd board, and only the CPRI ports on the LBBPd in slot 2 or 3 can
connect to RF units.
l In LTE TDD scenarios, the LBBPc cannot serve as a converging board and only can be a converged
board.
Panel
The LBBP has two types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-27 and Figure 3-28.
Figure 3-27 LBBPc panel
Figure 3-28 LBBPd panel
NOTE
The LBBPd1, LBBPd2, LBBPd3, and LBBPd4 have silkscreens LBBPd1, LBBPd2, LBBPd3, and
LBBPd4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.

DBS3900
Functions
The LBBP performs the following functions:
l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.
l Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules.
Indicators
On the LBBP panel, there are three indicators, as described in Table 3-59.
Table 3-59 Indicators on the LBBP panel

board is faulty.

board is faulty.
On for 1s and off for 1s The board is functioning

properly.
On for 0.125s and off for l The board is being loaded or

0.125s configured.

On for 1s and off for 1s An alarm is generated, and you

board.

board.

an active board.
l The board is not activated.
l The board does not provide
any services.
On for 1s and off for 1s The power supply for the board
is insufficient.
NOTE
Of all types of LBBP boards, only
the LBBPd has this status.

DBS3900
As listed in Table 3-60, the LBBP provides six indicators indicating the Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP) link status. The indicators are positioned above the SFP ports.
Table 3-60 SFP link status indicators


fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.
Blinking red (on for The RF module

0.125s and off for connected to the CPRI
0.125s) link has a hardware
fault.

following reasons:
lock between dual-
mode clock
sources.
l The data rates of
the CPRI ports do
not match each
other.

module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.
The LBBPd provides an indicator that indicates the Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable (QSFP)
link status. The indicator is above the QSFP port. Table 3-61 describes the indicator.

DBS3900
Table 3-61 QSFP link status indicator
HEI Red or green Steady green The inter-BBU

transmission link is
functional.

fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.
Blinking red (on for The interconnection

1s and off for 1s) link is out of lock
because of the
following reasons:
l There is no
mutual lock
between two
interconnected
BBUs.
l The data rates of
the QSFP ports do
not match each
other.

cannot be detected.
Ports
Table 3-62 describes the six CPRI ports on the LBBP panel.
Table 3-62 LBBP ports
CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP female 6 Connected to the RF

connector modules for
transmitting service
data, clock signals,
and synchronization
information.

DBS3900
Table 3-63 describes the QSFP port on the LBBPd panel.
Table 3-63 QSFP port on the LBBPd panel
HEI QSFP connector 1 Reserved
3.1.11 FAN
The FAN unit for the BBU3900 controls the speed of fans and monitors the temperature of the
fan unit. It reports the status of the fans and fan unit, and dissipates heat from the BBU.
Panel
The FAN units fall into two types: FAN and FANc, as shown in Figure 3-29 and Figure 3-30.
Figure 3-29 FAN

DBS3900
Figure 3-30 FANc
NOTE
There is a FANc silkscreen on the FANc while the FAN has no such silkscreen.
Functions
The FAN unit performs the following functions:
l Controls the fan speed.
l Reports the status, temperature, and in-position signal of the fans to the main control
processing unit.
l Monitors the temperature at the air intake vent.
l Dissipates heat.
l The FANc provides a read-write electronic label.
Indicator
There is only one indicator on the panel of the FAN unit, which indicates the operating status
of the fans. Table 3-64 describes the indicator.
Table 3-64 Indicator on the panel of the FAN unit
STATE Red or green Blinking green (on The module is not

for 0.125s and off for registered, and no
0.125s) alarm is reported.
Blinking green (on The module is

for 1s and off for 1s) working.
Blinking red (on for The module is

1s and off for 1s) reporting alarms.

DBS3900

supply.
3.1.12 UPEU
The universal power and environment interface unit (UPEU) for the BBU3900 converts -48 V
DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power.
Panel
The UPEU is classified into four types: universal power and environment interface unit type a
(UPEUa), universal power and environment interface unit type b (UPEUb), universal power and
environment interface unit type c (UPEUc), and universal power and environment interface unit
type d (UPEUd). The UPEUa, UPEUc, and UPEUd convert -48 V DC power into +12 V DC
power, and the UPEUb converts +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power. Figure 3-31, Figure
3-32, Figure 3-33, and Figure 3-34 show the panels of the UPEUa, UPEUb, UPEUc, and
UPEUd, respectively.
Figure 3-31 UPEUa panel
(1) BBU power switch (2) 7W2 connector
Figure 3-32 UPEUb panel
(1) BBU power switch (2) 7W2 connector

DBS3900
Figure 3-33 UPEUc panel
(1) BBU power switch (2) 3V3 connector
Figure 3-34 UPEUd panel
(1) BBU power switch (2) 3V3 connector
NOTE
The UPEUc and UPEUd have silkscreens "UPEUc" and "UPEUd" indicating their board types on them,
respectively, whereas the UPEUa and UPEUb do not have such silkscreens indicating their board types.
The UPEUa and UPEUb, however, can be distinguished by the silkscreens "-48 V" and "+24 V" on them.
Functions
The UPEU performs the following functions:
l Converts -48 V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power, which is the operating
voltage of the boards.
l Provides two ports with each receiving one RS485 signal and another two ports with each
receiving four Boolean signals. The Boolean signals can only be dry contact or Open
Collector (OC) signals.
Table 3-65 describes the specifications.

DBS3900
Table 3-65 Specifications
Board Output Power Backup Mode
UPEUa The output power of a 1+1 backup

UPEUa is 300 W.
UPEUc The output power of a 1+1 backup

UPEUc is 360 W, and the
output power of two UPEUc
boards is 650 W.
UPEUd The output power of a 1+1 backup

UPEUd is 650 W.
NOTE
A BBU cannot house two UPEUs of different types. When the power required by the BBU exceeds the
power specification of the BBU:
l If the BBU has been configured with one or two UPEUa boards, replace the boards with two UPEUc
boards.
l If the BBU has been configured with one UPEUc board, add a second UPEUc board.
Indicator
The UPEU has one indicator, which indicates the operating status of the UPEU. Table 3-66
describes the indicator.
Table 3-66 Indicator on the UPEU panel
RUN Green Steady on The board is

functional.

is faulty.
Port
The UPEU provides two RS485 signal ports, each receiving one RS485 signal, and two Boolean
signal ports, each receiving four Boolean signals. Figure 3-35 shows the slots in the BBU.
Figure 3-35 Slots in the BBU

DBS3900
Table 3-67 describes the ports on the UPEU panel.
Table 3-67 Description on the ports
Slot Silkscree Connecto Quantity Description

n r
Slot 19 +24 V or 3V3 or 1 Introducing +24 V or -48 V DC power

-48 V 7W2
connector
EXT- RJ45 1 Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3

ALM0 connector

ALM1 connector
MON0 RJ45 1 Port for RS485 input 0

connector

connector
Slot 18 +24 V or 3V3 or 1 Introducing +24 V or -48 V DC power

-48 V 7W2
connector

ALM0 connector

ALM1 connector

connector

connector
3.1.13 UEIU
The universal environment interface unit (UEIU) of the BBU3900 transmits monitoring signals
and alarm signals from external devices to the main control board.
Panel
Figure 3-36 shows the panel of the UEIU.

DBS3900
Figure 3-36 Panel of the UEIU
Functions
The UEIU performs the following functions:
l Provides two ports with each receiving one path of RS485 signal.
l Provides two ports with each receiving four paths of Boolean signals. The Boolean signals
can only be dry contact or OC signals.
l Transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main control
board.
Port
The UEIU is configured in slot 18 and provides two RS485 signal ports, each transmitting one
path of RS485 signals, and two Boolean signal ports, each transmitting four paths of Boolean
signals.
Table 3-68 describes the ports on the panel of the UEIU.
Table 3-68 Ports on the panel of the UEIU
Slot Silkscre Connect Quanti Description

en or ty
Slot 18 EXT- RJ45 1 Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3

ALM0 connector

ALM1 connector

connector

connector
3.1.14 UTRP
The universal transmission processing unit (UTRP) is an extended transmission board in the
BBU3900 and provides ports connecting to transmission equipment.

DBS3900
Specifications
Table 3-69 describes the specifications of the UTRP.
Table 3-69 Specifications of the UTRP
Board Sub- Supporte Transmis Number Port Full/

board/ d Mode sion of ports Capacity Half-
Board Mode Duplex
Type
UTRP2 UEOC UMTS Transmiss 2 10 Mbit/s, Full-

ion over 100 Mbit/ duplex
FE/GE s, and
optical 1000
ports Mbit/s
UTRP3 UAEC UMTS ATM over 2 Eight Full-

E1/T1 channels duplex
UTRP4 UIEC UMTS IP over E1/ 2 Eight Full-

T1 channels duplex
UTRPb4 Without a GSM TDM over 2 Eight Full-

sub-board E1/T1 channels duplex
UTRP6 UUAS UMTS STM-1/ 1 One Full-

OC-3 channel duplex
UTRP9 UQEC UMTS Transmiss 4 10 Mbit/s, Full-

ion over 100 Mbit/ duplex
FE/GE s, and
electrical 1000
ports Mbit/s
UTRPa Without a UMTS ATM over 2 Eight Full-

sub-board E1/T1 or channels duplex
IP over E1/
T1
UTRPc Without a GSM Transmiss 4 10 Mbit/s, Full-

sub-board UMTS ion over 100 Mbit/ duplex
FE/GE s, and
LTE electrical 1000
ports Mbit/s
Transmiss 2 100 Mbit/s Full-

ion over and 1000 duplex
FE/GE Mbit/s
optical
ports

DBS3900
Panel
Figure 3-37 shows the panel of the UTRP2.
Figure 3-37 Panel of the UTRP2 (with two optical ports)
Figure 3-38 shows the panel of the UTRP3 and UTRP4.
Figure 3-38 Panel of the UTRP3 and UTRP4 (with eight E1/T1 channels)
Figure 3-39 shows the panel of the UTRPb4 in GSM mode.
Figure 3-39 Panel of the UTRP4 (with eight E1/T1 channels)
Figure 3-40 Panel of the UTRP6 (with one STM-1 channel)

DBS3900
Figure 3-41 Panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports)
The following figure shows the UTRPa panel.
Figure 3-42 UTRPa panel (with eight E1/T1 channels)
Figure 3-43 shows the panel of the UTRPc.
Figure 3-43 Panel of the UTRPc (with four electrical ports and two optical ports)
Functions
The UTRP performs the following functions:
l Provides extended E1/T1 ports to connect to transmission equipment, supporting ATM,

TDM, and IP transmission.
l Provides electrical and optical transmission ports to connect to transmission equipment.
l Supports cold backup.
Restriction
The GTMUa cannot be used together with the UTRPc.
Indicators
Table 3-70 describes the indicators on the UTRP panel.

DBS3900
Table 3-70 Indicators on the UTRP panel

is faulty.

is faulty.
On for 1s and off for The board is running

1s properly.

configured.
l The board is not
started.

generated, and the
board needs to be
replaced.

properly.

need to locate the
whether to replace
the board.

an active board.

not serve as an
active board.
l The board has not
been activated.
l The board is not
providing any
services.
The ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode has different status from the ACT indicator
on other boards, as listed in Table 3-71.

DBS3900
Table 3-71 Status of the ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode
ACT Green Steady on l Before the

configuration
takes effect, none
or both of the two
E1 ports in GSM
mode are
functional.
l The
configuration has
taken effect.
On for 0.125s and off Before the

for 0.125s configuration takes
effect, only one E1
port in GSM mode is
functional.
Each Ethernet port on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc corresponds to two indicators indicating
the status of the current link, as listed in Table 3-72.
Table 3-72 Status of the indicators for Ethernet ports on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc
LINK Green Steady on The link is connected

properly.
Steady off The link is not

connected properly.
ACT Orange Blinking Data is being

transmitted or
received on the link.

transmitted or
received on the link.
There are three indicators on the UTRPc: R0, R1, and R2, of which the status is listed in Table
3-73.

DBS3900
Table 3-73 Status of indicators on the UTRPc
R0 Red or green Steady off The board is not

working in GSM
mode.
Steady green The board is working

in GSM mode.
Steady red Reserved

working in UMTS
mode.

in UMTS mode.
Steady red Reserved

working in LTE
mode.

in LTE mode.
Steady red Reserved
NOTE
If multiple indicators are on at the same time, the board works in multiple modes.
Ports
Table 3-74 describes the ports on the UTRP2.
Table 3-74 Ports on the panel of the UTRP2 (with 2 optical ports)
Silkscreen Port Type Quantity Connector
FE/GE0 and FE/GE1 FE/GE optical port 2 SFP female

connector
The UTRP3, UTRP4, UTRPa, and UTRPb4 have the same ports, as listed in Table 3-75.

DBS3900
Table 3-75 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, UTRPa, and UTRPb4 (with 8 E1/T1 ports)
E1/T1 E1/T1 port 2 DB26 female

connector
Table 3-76 lists the ports on the UTRP6.
Table 3-76 Ports on the panel of the UTRP6 (with one STM-1 channel)
STM-1/OC-3 STM-1/OC-3 1 SFP female

connector
Table 3-77 lists the ports on the UTRP9.
Table 3-77 Ports on the panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports)
FE/GE0 to FE/GE3 FE/GE electrical port 4 RJ45 connector
Table 3-78 describes the ports on the panel of the UTRPc.
Table 3-78 Ports on the panel of the UTRPc (with four electrical ports and two optical ports)
FE/GE0 and FE/GE1 FE/GE optical port 2 SFP female

connector
FE/GE2 to FE/GE5 FE/GE electrical port 4 RJ45 connector
DIP Switch
There is no DIP switch on the UTRP2, UTRP6, and UTRP9.
There are three DIP switches on the UTRP3, UTRP4, UTRPa, and UTRPb4. SW1 and SW2 are
used to set whether to ground the receiver end of the E1 cable, and SW3 is used to set the
resistance of the E1 cable. Figure 3-44 shows the DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4.
Figure 3-45 shows the DIP switches on the UTRPb4. Figure 3-46 shows the DIP switches on
the UTRPa.

DBS3900
Figure 3-44 DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4
Figure 3-45 DIP switches on the UTRPb4
Figure 3-46 DIP switches on the UTRPa
Table 3-79, Table 3-80, and Table 3-81 list the settings of the DIP switches on the UTRP.

DBS3900
Table 3-79 Settings of SW1 on the UTRP

Switch
1 2 3 4
Others Unavailable

Switch
1 2 3 4
Others Unavailable
NOTICE
SW1 and SW2 are set to OFF by default. SW1 corresponds to No.4 to No.7 E1 channels. SW2
corresponds to No.0 to No.3 E1 channels.

Switch
1 2 3 4
SW3 OFF OFF ON ON T1
ON ON OFF OFF The E1

resistance is
set to 120
ohm.
ON ON ON ON The E1
resistance is
set to 75 ohm.
Others Unavailable

DBS3900
3.1.15 USCU
This section describes the universal satellite card and clock unit (USCU).
Specifications
The USCU falls into three types, as shown in Table 3-82.
Table 3-82 Specifications of the USCU
Board Supported Mode Supported Satellite Card
USCUb11 LTE N/A
USCUb14 GSM UBLOX single-satellite card

UMTS
LTE
USCUb22 GSM Naviors dual-satellite card

UMTS
LTE
Panel
There are two types of USCU, as shown in Figure 3-47 and Figure 3-48.
NOTE
On the lower left side of the USCUb11 and USCUb14, there are silkscreens USCUb11 and USCUb14,
respectively, indicating their board types.
Figure 3-47 USCUb11 and USCUb14 panel
Figure 3-48 USCUb22 panel

DBS3900
Functions
The USCU has the following functions:
l The USCUb11 provides ports to communicate with the RGPS (for example the reused
equipment of the customer) and BITS equipment. It does not support GPS signals.
l The USCUb14 contains a UBLOX satelliate card, which does not support RGPS signals.
l The USCUb22 does not support RGPS signals. It uses a Naviors satellite card, which must
be purchased locally and installed onsite.
Indicators
Table 3-83 and Table 3-84 describe the indicators on the USCU.
Table 3-83 Indicators on the USCU

is faulty.

is faulty.


configured.
l The board is not
started.

generated, and the
board needs to be
replaced.

properly.

need to locate the
whether to replace
the board.

an active board.

DBS3900

not serve as an
active board.
l The board has not
been activated.
l The board is not
providing any
services.
Table 3-84 Indicators for the TOD ports
Color Status Description
Green (on the left) The green indicator is steady The TOD port is configured as
on and the orange indicator is an input port.
steady off.
Orange (on the right) The orange indicator is steady The TOD port is configured as
on and the green indicator is an output port.
steady off.
Ports
Table 3-85 describes the ports on the USCU.
Table 3-85 Ports on the USCU
GPS SMA connector The GPS ports on the USCUb14 and USCUb22
receive GPS signals.
The GPS port on the USCUb11 is reserved and
cannot receive GPS signals.
RGPS port PCB welded The RGPS port on the USCUb11 receives RGPS
wiring terminal signals.
The RGPS ports on the USCUb14 and USCUb22 are
reserved and cannot receive RGPS signals.
TOD0 port RJ45 connector This port receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals.
TOD1 port RJ45 connector This port receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals,
and receives TOD signals from the M1000.

DBS3900
BITS port SMA connector This port receives BITS clock signals, supports
adaptive input of 2.048 MHz and 10 MHz clock
reference source.
M-1PPS port SMA connector This port receives 1PPS signals from the M1000.
3.1.16 UBRI
The universal baseband radio interface board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical or
electrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the
CPRI.
Panel
Figure 3-49 shows the panel of the UBRI.
Figure 3-49 UBRI panel
Functions
The UBRI performs the following functions:
l Provides extended CPRI electrical or optical ports.
l Performs convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI.
Indicators
Table 3-86 describes the indicators on the UBRI panel.
Table 3-86 Indicators on the UBRI panel

board is faulty.

board is faulty.
On for 1s and off for 1s The board is running properly.

DBS3900
On for 0.125s and off for Software is being loaded to the

0.125s board.
ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated on the

board.
On for 1s and off for 1s An alarm is generated and you

board.

board.

an active board.
activated.
any services.
The UBRI provides six indicators indicating the status of the CRRI links. The indicators are
above the SFP ports. Table 3-87 describes the indicators.
Table 3-87 CPRI port status indicators


fails to receive signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

DBS3900

following reasons:
lock between dual-
mode clock
sources.
l The data rates of
the CPRI ports do
not match each
other.

module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.
Ports
Table 3-88 describes the ports on the UBRI panel.
Table 3-88 Ports on the UBRI panel
CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP female 6 Connecting the BBU

connector and the RF module
The following table lists the specifications of the CPRI ports on the UBRI.
Table 3-89 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the UBRI
Board CPRI Port CPRI Port Data Topology Type

Quantity Rate (Gbit/s)
UBRI 6 1.25/2.5 Star, chain, and ring

topologies
3.1.17 UCIU
The universal inter-connection infrastructure unit (UCIU) interconnects BBUs. It forwards
control and synchronization information from one BBU to another.

DBS3900
Panel
Figure 3-50 shows the UCIU panel.
Figure 3-50 UCIU panel
Functions
The UCIU performs the following functions:
l Supports single- or multi-mode configuration and management. When in multi-mode, it is

shared by multiple modes and can be configured and managed by any mode.
l Interconnects BBUs and forwards control and synchronization information from one BBU
to another.
l Supports co-site of a 3900 series base station and a 3012 series base station.
l Supports the connection to a UMPT using a fiber optic cable.
Indicators
A UCIU provides one DB15 port, three running indicators, and six SFP+ ports for
interconnection, with one double-colored indicator on each port. Table 3-90 describes the
indicators on the UCIU panel.
Table 3-90 Indicators on the UCIU panel

board is faulty.

board is faulty.
On for 1s and off for The board is running properly.

1s
On for 0.125s and off l The board is being loaded or

for 0.125s configured.

Steady off There is no fault.

DBS3900
On for 1s and off for An alarm is generated and you

1s need to locate the fault before
board.

board.

an active board.
activated.
any services.
M0 to M4 Red or green Steady green The inter-BBU transmission

and S0 link is normal.
Steady red The optical module fails to

transmit or receive signals, or
the fiber optic cable is faulty.
Blinking red (on for Cables are connected in an

0.125s and off for incorrect manner. For example:
0.125s) l In the UCIU+UMPT
scenario, the S0 port on the
UCIU is connected to the CI
port on the UMPT.
Indicators for the S0 and CI
ports are blinking.
l The ports are connected in
ring topology. Indicators for
all incorrectly connected
ports are blinking.
Steady off The optical module cannot be

detected.
Ports
Table 3-91 describes UCIU ports.
Table 3-91 UCIU ports
M0 to M4 SFP female Primary inter-BBU ports, which connect to the

connector secondary inter-BBU ports.

DBS3900
S0 SFP female Secondary inter-BBU port, which connects to the

connector primary inter-BBU port.
GCK DB15 connector Provides reference clocks when the base station
and a 3012 series base station are combined.
3.2 RRU
The Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antenna
system.
The RRU implements the following functions:

l Receives downlink baseband data from the BBU and sends uplink baseband data for the
communication between the BBU and the RRU.
l The RX channel receives RF signals from the antenna system, down-converts the received
signals to IF signals, amplifies the IF signals, and performs analog-to-digital (A/D)
conversion. The TX channel filters downlink signals, performs digital-to-analog (D/A)
conversion, and up-converts RF signals to the TX band.
l Multiplexes RX and TX signals, which enables these signals to share the same antenna
path. It also filters the RX and TX signals.
For details about various types of RRUs, see the hardware description of the corresponding RRU.
3.3 SLPU
The signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP,
UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection.
3.3.1 SLPU
The SLPU, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 1 U high.
Figure 3-51 shows the SLPU.
Figure 3-51 SLPU
3.3.2 Slot Assignment Rules for the SLPU

This section describes the slot assignment rules for the SPLU boards.

DBS3900
Slots of the SLPU

Figure 3-52 shows the slots of the SLPU.
Figure 3-52 SLPU slots
Slot Assignment Rules for the SLPU

When the SLPU is used as a trunk signal protection unit, a mandatory component, it can be
integrated with UELP or UFLP and is installed in the 1 U space in the upper part of the cabinet.
Table 3-92 lists the slot assignment rules of the SLPU.
Table 3-92 Slot assignment rules for the SLPU
Board Optional or Maximum Slot Remarks

Mandatory Quantity
UELP Optional 4 Slot 0 to slot 3 The UELP is

installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 2, 0, 1, or
3.
UFLP Optional 1 Slot 3 If both the

UELP and
UFLP are
configured, the
UFLP is
installed in a slot
with a higher
priority than the
UELP.
When there are not more than 16 dry contacts in the SLPU, the SLPU is used as a monitoring
signal protection unit, which is an optional component. In this case, the SLPU is integrated with
two USLP2s and installed in the 1 U (44.45 mm or 1.75 in.) space at the bottom of the BBU.
Table 3-93 lists the slot assignment rules for the SLPU.

DBS3900
Table 3-93 Slot assignment rules for the SLPU
Board Optional or Quantity Slot Remarks

Mandatory
USLP2 Optional 2 Slot 2 and slot 3 -
3.3.3 UELP
Each universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) provides surge protection for four paths
of E1/T1 signals.
Panel
Figure 3-53 shows the panel of the UELP.
Figure 3-53 UELP panel
Ports
Table 3-94 lists the ports on the UELP.
Table 3-94 Ports on the UELP
INSIDE DB25 female connector Connecting to a transmission

board of the base station
OUTSIDE DB26 female connector Connecting to an external

transmission device
DIP Switch
The UELP has one DIP switch, which is used to determine whether the receiving end is grounded.
The DIP switch has four DIP bits. Figure 3-54 shows the DIP switch on the UELP.

DBS3900
Figure 3-54 DIP switch on the UELP
Table 3-95 describes the DIP switch on the UELP.
Table 3-95 DIP switch on the UELP

Switch
1 2 3 4
S1 OFF OFF OFF OFF Not grounded
Other status Grounded
NOTE
The E1 cable of 75 ohms can be either grounded or not, whereas the E1 cable of 120 ohms and the T1 cable
of 100 ohms cannot be grounded.
3.3.4 UFLP
Each universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP) provides protection for two channels of FE
signals. Each universal FE lightning protection unit type B (UFLPB) provides protection for two
channels of FE/GE signals.

DBS3900
NOTE
The UFLPB applies only to the LTE mode.
Panel
Figure 3-55 shows the UELP panel.
Figure 3-55 UELP panel
Figure 3-56 shows the UFLPB panel.
Figure 3-56 UFLPB panel
Port
Table 3-96 describes UFLP ports.
Table 3-96 UFLP ports
Port Location Silkscreen Connector Description
INSIDE side FE0 and FE1 RJ45 connector Connecting to a

transmission board of the
base station
OUTSIDE side FE0 and FE1 RJ45 connector Connecting to an external

transmission device
Table 3-97 describes UFLPB ports.

DBS3900
Table 3-97 UFLPB ports
Port Location Silkscreen on the Connector Description

Panel
INSIDE side FE/GE0 and FE/GE1 RJ45 connector Connecting to a

transmission board
of the base station
OUTSIDE side FE/GE0 and FE/GE1 RJ45 connector Connecting to an

external
transmission device
3.3.5 USLP2
The Universal Signal Lightning Protection Unit Type 2 (USLP2) is a dry contact surge protection
unit. It is optional and can be installed in the SLPU.
Panel
Figure 3-57 shows the panel of a USLP2.
Figure 3-57 Panel of a USLP2
Port
There are four input ports and two output ports on the USLP2. Table 3-98 lists the ports on the
panel of the USLP2.
Table 3-98 Ports on the panel of the USLP2
Silkscreen on Port Type Quantity Description

the Panel
IN0, IN1, IN2, 4-pin 4 Input ports, which

and IN3 connect to customized
alarm devices
OUT0 and OUT1 RJ45 connector 2 Output ports, which

connect to an EXT-
ALM port of the UPEU
or UEIU in the cabinet

DBS3900
Figure 3-58 shows the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on
the USLP2.
Figure 3-58 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2
OUT0 OUT1 IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
8 6 4 2 8 6 4 2
Table 3-99 lists the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the
USLP2.
Table 3-99 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2
Input Output
Silkscreen on the Pin Silkscreen on the Pin

Panel Panel
INO IN0.1 OUT1 OUT1.1
IN0.2 OUT1.2
IN0.3 OUT1.4
IN0.4 OUT1.5
IN1 IN1.1 OUT1.3
IN1.2 OUT1.6
IN1.3 OUT1.7
IN1.4 OUT1.8
IN2 IN2.1 OUT0 OUT0.1
IN2.2 OUT0.2
IN2.3 OUT0.4
IN2.4 OUT0.5
IN3 IN3.1 OUT0.3
IN3.2 OUT0.6
IN3.3 OUT0.7

DBS3900
Input Output
Silkscreen on the Pin Silkscreen on the Pin

Panel Panel
IN3.4 OUT0.8
For details about the application of the USLP2, see 3.3.2 Slot Assignment Rules for the
SLPU.
3.4 WGRU
The WCDMA GPS receiving unit (WGRU) receives and processes the positioning information
and clock synchronization signals to provide clock reference for the base station. The clock
signals together with the positioning information can be converted into PPS signals and A-GPS
positioning information. The WGRU is optional and is installed in a dedicated case. Each base
station can be configured with a WGRU.
Exterior
Figure 3-59 shows a WGRU. Figure 3-60 shows a WGRU installed in a case.
Figure 3-59 WGRU

DBS3900
Figure 3-60 WGRU installed in a case
Panel
As shown in Figure 3-61, there are indicators, a reset button, and ports on the front panel of the
WGRU.
As shown in Figure 3-62, there is a power input socket and a GPS signal input port on the rear
panel of the WGRU.
Figure 3-61 Front panel of a WGRU

DBS3900
Figure 3-62 Rear panel of a WGRU
Indicators on the Front Panel

On the front panel of the WGRU, there are three indicators: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table
3-100 describes the three indicators.
Table 3-100 Indicators on the front panel of the WGRU

RUN Green On for 1s and off for The WGRU is

1s running properly.
Steady on There is power

supply, but the
WGRU suite is
faulty.

supply, or the
WGRU suite is
faulty.
ALM Red Steady off No alarm is

generated.
Steady on An alarm is reported,

indicating a fault
during the operation.
ACT Green Steady on The WGRU has

interpreted the
positioning
information.
Steady off The WGRU fails to

interpret the
positioning
information.

DBS3900
Ports on the Front Panel

On the front panel of the WGRU, there are six ports: PPS1, PPS2, COM1, COM2, CLK1, and
CLK2. Table 3-101 describes the six ports.
Table 3-101 Ports on the front panel of the WGRU
Silkscreen Port Type Description
PPS1 RJ45 connector Outputs PPS signals.
PPS2 RJ45 connector Reserved
COM1 RJ45 connector Forwards GPS information

and BBU interaction,
management, and
maintenance information.
COM2 RJ45 connector Reserved
CLK1 RJ45 connector Reserved
CLK2 RJ45 connector Reserved
Ports on the Rear Panel

On the rear panel of the WGRU, there are two ports: POWER and ANT.
Table 3-102 describes the two ports.
Table 3-102 Ports on the rear panel of the WGRU
POWER Two-pole male connector Feeds external power.
ANT N-type female connector Connects to the GPS antenna

system.
3.5 EMUA/EMUB
The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA/EMUB) monitors the internal environment of the
cabinet and reports related alarms.
The EMUA/EMUB is connected to the main equipment through alarm cables, monitoring the
environment information of the equipment room and cabinet. The EMUA/EMUB monitors the
following items:
l Environment such as the temperature and humidity, water damage, and smoke
l Intrusion status through the infrared equipment and door status sensor

DBS3900
l Power distribution
For details about the structure and functions of the EMUA, see the EMUA User Guide.
For details about the structure and functions of the EMUB, see the EMUB User Guide.

DBS3900
Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the exteriors, structures, specifications, and application scenarios of
various DBS3900 cabinets and racks as well as the requirements for equipment in the DBS3900
cabinets.
For details about the exterior, functions, specifications, and components of the TP48600A
cabinet, see TP48600A-H17B1 User Manual. For details about the exterior, functions,
specifications, and components of the IBBS700D and IBBS700T cabinets, see IBBS700D &
IBBS700T User Guide.
4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks Used by the DBS3900

To adapt to the complicated and various environments indoors and outdoors, Huawei provides
multiple cabinets with different functions for the distributed base station. The cabinets are the
APM series cabinets, TMC series cabinets, battery cabinets, OMB/OMB (Ver.C), IMB03, and
IFS06. APM is short for advanced power module, TMC is short for transmission cabinet, OMB
is short for outdoor mini box, IMB is short for indoor mini box, and IFS is short for indoor floor
installation support.
4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by the DBS3900

This section describes the module or board configurations of cabinets used by the DBS3900.
4.3 Engineering Specifications of Various Cabinets Used by the DBS3900

This section describes the engineering specifications of various cabinets used by the DBS3900.
4.4 Components in DBS3900 Cabinets

This section describes the components in various DBS3900 cabinets.
4.5 Engineering Specifications of Internal Equipment

The equipment in the various DBS3900 cabinets must meet the requirements for engineering
specifications.

DBS3900
4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks Used by the DBS3900

To adapt to the complicated and various environments indoors and outdoors, Huawei provides
multiple cabinets with different functions for the distributed base station. The cabinets are the
APM series cabinets, TMC series cabinets, battery cabinets, OMB/OMB (Ver.C), IMB03, and
IFS06. APM is short for advanced power module, TMC is short for transmission cabinet, OMB
is short for outdoor mini box, IMB is short for indoor mini box, and IFS is short for indoor floor
installation support.
APM/TMC Series Cabinets

Figure 4-1 shows the APM/TMC series cabinets: APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), APM30H
(Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), TMC, TMC11H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.B),
TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D). APM30H is short for advanced power module with
a heat exchanger, and TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heat exchanger.
Figure 4-1 Exteriors of the APM/TMC series cabinets
Battery Cabinets
The battery cabinets include the BBC, IBBS200T (Ver.A), IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200T
(Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200T (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), IBBS200T (Ver.D),
IBBS700D, and IBBS700T. Figure 4-2 shows the IBBS700D and IBBS700T, and Figure 4-3
shows other types of battery cabinets.

DBS3900
Figure 4-2 IBBS700D and IBBS700T
Figure 4-3 Other types of battery cabinets

DBS3900
OMB/OMB (Ver.C)
Figure 4-4 shows the OMB and OMB (Ver.C).
Figure 4-4 Exteriors of the OMB and OMB (Ver.C)
IMB03/IFS06
Figure 4-5 shows the IMB03 and IFS06.
Figure 4-5 Exteriors of the IMB03 and IFS06
4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by the DBS3900

This section describes the module or board configurations of cabinets used by the DBS3900.

DBS3900
Functions
NOTE
For the functions of cabinets used by the DBS3900, see the APM30&BBC&TMC User Guide,
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T
(Ver.B) Product Description, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.C) Product
Description, and APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.D) Product Description.
The main functions of cabinets used by the DBS3900 are as follows:

l The advanced power module (APM) series cabinets are the power cabinets, which are used
for Huawei wireless products outdoors. The APM series cabinets provide AC and DC power
distribution functions for distributed or separate base stations used outdoors and also
provide space for customer equipment.
– The differences between the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A) reside in the heat dissipation
and monitoring modes. The APM30 uses breathable film and fans to dissipate heat, and
the APM30H (Ver.A) uses a heat exchanger as well as inner and outer air circulation
fans to dissipate heat. The APM30 is configured with an APM power monitoring
interface unit (APMI) and APM fan monitoring interface unit (AFMU) for environment
and power monitoring, and the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with a heat exchange
unit type A (HEUA) for fan monitoring and alarm reporting.
– The differences between the APM30H (Ver.A) and APM30H (Ver.B) reside in the
monitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver.A) uses an HEUA in the
fan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms, and the APM30H (Ver.B) uses a central
monitoring unit type A (CMUA) to perform centralized monitoring. The APM30H
(Ver.A) uses a power distribution unit (PDU) to distribute power, and the APM30H
(Ver.B) uses an embedded power system (EPS) to distribute power. In addition, the
APM30H (Ver.B) uses an electronic label unit (ELU) to report the cabinet type.
– The differences between the APM30H (Ver.C) and APM30H (Ver.B) reside in the
monitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver.C) uses a central
monitoring unit type E (CMUE) in the fan assembly to monitor the fans and report
alarms, and the APM30H (Ver.B) uses a CMUA to perform centralized monitoring.
The APM30H (Ver.C) uses an embedded power subrack unit (EPU), EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05, to distribute power, and the APM30H (Ver.B) uses an EPS to distribute
power.
– The differences between the APM30H(Ver.D) and APM30H (Ver.C) reside in the
monitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H(Ver.D) uses a CMUEA in the
fan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms, and the APM30H (Ver.C) uses a CMUE
in the fan assembly to monitor the fans and report alarms. The EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05 installed in the APM30H(Ver.D) has higher power distribution capacity
than the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 installed in the APM30H (Ver.C).
l The transmission cabinets (TMCs) are used for Huawei wireless products outdoors. The
TMC series cabinets provide DC power distribution functions for distributed or separate
base stations and also provide space for customer equipment.
– The differences between the TMC and TMC11H (Ver.A) reside in the heat dissipation
and monitoring modes. The differences between the TMC11H (Ver.A) and TMC11H
(Ver.B) reside in the monitoring mode. The TMC uses breathable film and fans to
dissipate heat, and the TMC11H (Ver.A) uses a heat exchanger as well as inner and
outer air circulation fans to dissipate heat. The TMC uses an APMI and an AFMU to
monitor other components, the TMC11H (Ver.A) uses an HEUA to monitor other
components, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) uses a CMUA and a HERT power monitoring

DBS3900
interface unit (HPMI) to monitor other components. In addition, the TMC11H (Ver.B)
uses an ELU to report the cabinet type.
– The differences between the TMC11H (Ver.C) and TMC11H (Ver.B) reside in the
monitoring and power distribution modes. The TMC11H (Ver.C) uses a CMUE in the
fan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) uses a CMUA
to perform centralized monitoring. The TMC11H (Ver.C) uses a DCDU-11B to
distribute power, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) uses a DCDU-03B to distribute power.
– The differences between the TMC11H(Ver.D) and TMC11H (Ver.C) reside in the
monitoring and power distribution modes. The TMC11H(Ver.D) uses a CMUEA in the
fan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms, and the TMC11H (Ver.C) uses a CMUE
in the fan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms. The TMC11H(Ver.D) uses a
DCDU-12B to distribute power, and the TMC11H (Ver.C) uses a DCDU-11B to
distribute power.
l Battery cabinets are used for Huawei wireless products outdoors. The cabinets provide
space for storage batteries, which provide long-duration backup power for distributed or
separate base stations. The IBBS200D and IBBS200T differ in the heat dissipation mode.
l The outdoor mini box (OMB) and OMB (Ver.C) apply to outdoor distributed base stations.
Their differences reside in the monitoring and power distribution modes. The OMB uses
an AC/DC power system or DCDU-03B to supply power to the BBU and RRUs, and the
OMB (Ver.C) uses an ETP48100-A1 or PDU10D-01 to supply power to the BBU and
RRUs. The OMB uses an HEUA to monitor fans and report alarms, and the OMB (Ver.C)
uses an HEUB to monitor fans and report alarms.
l The indoor mini box 03 (IMB03) applies to indoor distributed base stations. It uses a BBU
and other customer equipment, and supports either AC or DC power input. The indoor floor
installation support 06 (IFS06) applies to indoor distributed base stations, and supports
centralized installation of RRUs.
l The TP48600A is an outdoor power cabinet. It provides AC and DC power distribution
functions for distributed base stations outdoors and also provides space for customer
equipment. The TP48600A uses storage batteries which provide backup power for
distributed base stations.
APM
The APM series cabinets are classified into APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), APM30H (Ver.B),
APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H(Ver.D). Figure 4-6 shows the configurations of the APM
series cabinets.

DBS3900
Figure 4-6 Configurations of the APM series cabinets
Different types of the APM series cabinets use different heat dissipation, power distribution, and
monitoring modes, which are supported by various components, as listed in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Functions of the components in the APM series cabinets
Cabinet No. Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio

Type Board Mandatory Quantity n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
APM30 1 Fan Mandatory 1 The fan

assembly assembly
configured
with the
APMI,
AFMU, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.
2 PDU Mandatory 1 The PDU

distributes
AC power
and DC
power.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
3 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU is

installed in
the 2 U space
below the
PDU,
processing
baseband
signals.
4 PSU (AC/ Mandatory 3 The PSU

DC) converts 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC. It is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
5 PMU Mandatory 1 The PMU is

configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
APM30H 1 Fan Mandatory 1 The fan

(Ver.A) assembly assembly
configured
with the
HEUA,
HPMI, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.
2 PDU Mandatory 1 The PDU

distributes
AC power
and DC
power.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

installed in
the 2 U space
below the
PDU,
processing
baseband
signals.

DC) converts 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC. It is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.

configured
only in an
AC cabinet.

(Ver.B) assembly assembly
configured
with the
HPMI,
CMUA, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
2 SLPU Mandatory 2 To protect

trunk
signals, a
signal
lightning
protection
unit (SLPU)
configured
with a
universal E1/
T1 lighting
protection
unit (UELP)
or/and a
universal FE/
GE lightning
protection
(UFLP) is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
3 EPS Mandatory 1 The PDU

distributes
AC power
and DC
power. It is
configured
only in the
APM30H
(Ver.B).

installed in
the 2 U space
below the
EPS,
processing
baseband
signals.

DC) converts 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC. It is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.

configured
only in an
AC cabinet.

(Ver.C) assembly assembly
configured
with the
HPMI,
CMUE, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.
3 EPU Mandatory 1 The PDU

(EPU03A-0 distributes
3 or AC power
EPU03A-05 and DC
) power. It is
configured
only in the
APM30H
(Ver.C).

installed in
the 2 U space
below the
EPU,
processing
baseband
signals.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

DC) converts 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC. It is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.

configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
APM30H 1 Fan Mandatory 1 A fan

(Ver.D) assembly assembly is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet. It is
configured
with fans and
the CMUEA.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.
3 EPU Mandatory 1 The PDU

(EPU05A-0 distributes
3 or AC power
EPU05A-05 and DC
) power.

installed in
the 2 U space
below the
EPU,
processing
baseband
signals.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

DC) converts 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC. It is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.

configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
TMC
The TMC series cabinets are classified into the TMC, TMC11H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.B),
TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H(Ver.D). TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heat
exchanger. The TMC series cabinets can also be classified into the following types based on
different application scenarios:
l Figure 4-7 shows TMC cabinets which provide space for the transmission equipment.
Figure 4-7 TMC series cabinets (1)

DBS3900
l Figure 4-8 shows the TMC configured with the BBU in the -48 V DC power supply
scenario.
Figure 4-8 TMC series cabinets (2)
Different types of TMC cabinets use different heat dissipation and monitoring modes, which are
supported by various components, as listed in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Functions of the components in the TMC series cabinets

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
TMC 1 Fan Mandatory 1 The fan

assembly assembly
configured
with the
APMI,
AFMU, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
2 DCDU-03 Mandatory 1 l The TMC

is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3C when
the TMC
provides
space
only for
the
transmiss
ion
equipme
nt.
l The TMC
with a
built-in
BBU is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3B when
the -48 V
DC
power is
supplied.

installed in
the 2 U space
below the
DCDU-03B,
processing
baseband
signals.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
TMC11H 1 Fan Mandatory 1 The fan

(Ver.A) assembly assembly
configured
with the
HEUA,
HPMI, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.
2 DCDU-03 Mandatory 1 l The

TMC11H
(Ver.A)
is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3C when
the TMC
provides
space
only for
the
transmiss
ion
equipme
nt.
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.A)
with a
built-in
BBU is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3B when
the -48 V
DC
power is
supplied.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

installed in
the 2 U space
below the
DCDU-03B,
processing
baseband
signals.

(Ver.B) assembly assembly
configured
with the
HPMI,
CMUA, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

TMC11H
(Ver.B) is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3C when
the
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
provides
space
only for
the
transmiss
ion
equipme
nt.
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
with a
built-in
BBU is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3B when
the -48 V
DC
power is
supplied.

installed in
the 2 U space
below the
DCDU-03B,
processing
baseband
signals.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

(Ver.C) assembly assembly
configured
with the
HPMI,
CMUE, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.

trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

TMC11H
(Ver.C) is
configure
d with a
DCDU-1
1C when
the
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
provides
space
only for
the
transmiss
ion
equipme
nt.
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
with a
built-in
BBU is
configure
d with a
DCDU-1
1B when
the -48 V
DC
power is
supplied.

installed in
the 2 U space
below the
DCDU-11B,
processing
baseband
signals.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
TMC11H 1 Fan Mandatory 1 A fan

serving as a installed at
transmission the top of the
cabinet cabinet. It is
configured
with fans and
the CMUEA.
2 SLPU Optional 1 When the

TMC11H
(Ver.D)
houses BBU
1 (leaf BBU),
an SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
installed in
the top 1 U
space of the
TMC11H
(Ver.D).
3 DCDU-12C Mandatory 1 The

TMC11H
(Ver.D) is
configured
with a
DCDU-12C
when the
TMC
provides
space only
for the
transmission
equipment or
is configured
with BBU 1
(leaf BBU).

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
4 BBU Optional 1 In triple-

mode
scenarios,
BBU 1 (leaf
BBU) can be
installed in
the TMC11H
(Ver.D).
TMC11H 1 Fan Mandatory 1 A fan

serving as a installed at
power the top of the
cabinet cabinet. It is
configured
with fans and
the CMUEA.

trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
3 DCDU-12B Mandatory 1 When the

TMC11H
(Ver.D)
serves as a
power
cabinet, it is
configured
with a
DCDU-12B.

installed in
the 2 U space
below the
DCDU-12B,
processing
baseband
signals.
BBC/IBBS
The battery cabinets are classified into BBC, IBBS200T (Ver.A), IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200T
(Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.B), and IBBS200D (Ver.C). Figure 4-9 shows the configurations of
the BBC or IBBS series cabinets.
Figure 4-9 Components in the BBC/IBBS series cabinets
The differences between the BBC, IBBS200D, and IBBS200T reside in the monitoring and heat
dissipation module configurations, as listed in Table 4-3.

DBS3900
Table 4-3 Functions of the components in the IBBS series cabinets

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
BBC 1 Power Mandatory 1 The power

supply box supply box
for the feeds power
heating film into the
heating film.
2 Ground bar Mandatory 1 The ground

for the bar is used
cabinet for the
grounding of
the
components
in the
cabinet.
3 Storage Mandatory 8 The storage

battery batteries
provide
long-
duration
backup
power for
base stations.
4 BBC Mandatory 4 The BBC

provides
power to
storage
batteries.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
IBBS200T 1 TEC Mandatory 1 The

(Ver.A) thermoelectr
ic cooling
unit (TEC) is
installed in
the
protecting
hood for the
TEC on the
front door of
the cabinet.
The TEC
consists of
the TEC
module,
inner air
circulation
fan, outer air
circulation
fan, heat-
dissipation
piece, and
monitoring
board.
2 Transfer Mandatory 1 The transfer

terminal for terminal
the signal block for the
cable signal cable
is installed
on the inner
side of the
front door of
the cabinet. It
consists of
four
interconnecti
on terminals.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
3 Transfer Mandatory 1 The transfer

terminal for terminal for
the input the input
power cable power cable
for the TEC for the TEC
is installed
on the inner
side of the
front door of
the cabinet.

battery batteries
provide
long-
duration
backup
power for
base stations.
5 Junction box Mandatory 1 The junction

for the power box for the
cable power cable
is installed
on the inner
right side of
the
IBBS200T.
It consists of
the copper
bar, circuit
breaker for
the batteries,
and circuit
breaker for
the TEC.
IBBS200D 1 Fan Mandatory 2 The fan is

(Ver.B)/ installed on
(Ver.C) the front
door of the
cabinet,
dissipating
heat from the
cabinet.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
2 CMUA/ Mandatory 1 A CMUA or

CMUE CMUE
provides the
following
functions:
temperature
control,
Boolean
alarm
detection,
and ELU
identificatio
n of the
cabinet.
3 Power Optional 1 The power

distribution distribution
box box is
installed on
the upper
inner right
side of the
cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.

battery batteries
provide
long-
duration
backup
power for
base stations.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
IBBS200T 1 TEC Mandatory 1 The TEC is

(Ver.B)/ installed in
(Ver.C) the
protecting
hood for the
TEC on the
front door of
the cabinet.
The TEC
consists of
the TEC
module,
inner air
circulation
fan, outer air
circulation
fan, heat-
dissipation
piece, and
monitoring
board.
2 CMUA/ Mandatory 1 A CMUA or

CMUE CMUE
provides the
following
functions:
temperature
control,
Boolean
alarm
detection,
and ELU
identificatio
n of the
cabinet.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
3 Power Mandatory 8 The power

box box is
installed on
the upper
inner right
side of the
cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.

battery batteries
provide
long-
duration
backup
power for
base stations.
IBBS200D 1 Fan Mandatory 1 The fan is

(Ver.D) installed on
the front
door of the
cabinet,
dissipating
heat from the
cabinet.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
2 CMUEA Mandatory 1 The

CMUEA
provides
functions of
temperature
control,
Boolean
alarm
detection,
and ELU
identificatio
n of the
cabinet.

box box is
installed on
the upper
inner right
side of the
cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.

battery batteries
provide
long-
duration
backup
power for
base stations.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
IBBS200T 1 TEC Mandatory 1 The TEC is

(Ver.D) installed in
the
protecting
hood for the
TEC on the
front door of
the cabinet.
The TEC
consists of
the TEC
module,
inner air
circulation
fan, outer air
circulation
fan, heat-
dissipation
piece, and
monitoring
board.
2 CMUEA Mandatory 1 The

CMUEA
provides
functions of
temperature
control,
Boolean
alarm
detection,
and ELU
identificatio
n of the
cabinet.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

box box is
installed on
the upper
inner right
side of the
cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.

battery batteries
provide
long-
duration
backup
power for
base stations.
The following figure shows the interiors of the IBBS700D and IBBS700T.

DBS3900
Figure 4-10 Interiors of the IBBS700D and IBBS700T
The following table describes the components in the IBBS700D and IBBS700T.
Table 4-4 Components in the IBBS700D and IBBS700T
Cabinet No. Componen Optional/ Maximum Remarks

Type t Mandatory Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
IBBS700D 1 Fan Mandatory 1 The fan

mounting mounting
frame frame is
installed in
the lower
middle in the
front door of
the cabinet,
and
configured
with a fan.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
2 CMUEA Mandatory 1 The central

monitoring
unit type EA
(CMUEA)
controls
temperature,
detects
Boolean
alarm, and
identifies the
ELU.
3 and 4 ELU Mandatory 1 The

electronic
label unit
(ELU)
reports the
cabinet type
automaticall
y to facilitate
troubleshoot
ing.
When a CCU
is
configured,
the ELU is
installed in
position 4.
When no
CCU is
configured,
the ELU is
installed in
position 3.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
5 CCU - 1 The cabinet

control unit
(CCU)
monitors the
operating
environment
of the cabinet
and manages
devices.
When an
APM30H
(Ver.D) is
configured,
no CCU is
installed.
When a
TP48600A-
H17B1 is
configured,
the CCU
must be
installed.
6 AC Junction Mandatory 1 The AC

box junction box
is installed
on the inner
left wall of
the cabinet. It
provides
power for the
heater.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
7 HAU01A-01 Optional 1 The Heater

Assembly
Unit 01A-01
(HAU01A-0
1) ensures a
suitable
storage and
operating
temperature
for the
storage
batteries.

battery batteries
provide
long-
duration
backup
power for
base stations.
9 Door status Mandatory 1 The door

sensor status sensor
monitors the
status (open
or closed) of
the front
door of the
cabinet.

box box is
installed in
the middle of
the cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
IBBS700T 1 Inner air Mandatory 1 The inner air

circulation circulation
fan fan is
installed at
the top of the
front door of
the cabinet. It
dissipates
heat from the
storage
batteries.
2 TEC Mandatory 1 To dissipate

heat from the
storage
batteries, the
TEC ensures
the normal
operation of
the cabinet in
high-
temperature
areas.
3 Outer air Mandatory 1 The outer air

circulation circulation
fan fan is
installed at
the bottom of
the front
door of the
cabinet. It
dissipates
heat from the
TEC.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
4 CMUF Mandatory 1 The central

monitoring
unit type F
(CMUF)
controls
temperature,
detects
Boolean
alarm, and
identifies the
ELU.
5 and 6 ELU Mandatory 1 The

electronic
label unit
(ELU)
reports the
cabinet type
automaticall
y to facilitate
troubleshoot
ing.
When a CCU
is
configured,
the ELU is
installed in
position 6.
When no
CCU is
configured,
the ELU is
installed in
position 5.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
7 CCU - 1 The cabinet

control unit
(CCU)
monitors the
operating
environment
of the cabinet
and manages
devices.
When an
APM30H
(Ver.D) is
configured,
no CCU is
installed.
When a
TP48600A-
H17B1 is
configured,
the CCU
must be
installed.
8 AC Junction Mandatory 1 The AC

box junction box
is installed
on the inner
left wall of
the cabinet. It
provides
power for the
heater.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
9 HAU01A-01 Optional 1 The Heater

Assembly
Unit 01A-01
(HAU01A-0
1) ensures a
suitable
storage and
operating
temperature
for the
storage
batteries.

battery batteries
provide
long-
duration
backup
power for
base stations.
11 Door status Mandatory 1 The door

sensor status sensor
monitors the
status (open
or closed) of
the front
door of the
cabinet.

box box is
installed in
the middle of
the cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.

DBS3900
OMB/OMB (Ver.C)
Figure 4-11 shows the configurations of OMBs, including the AC and DC OMBs.
Figure 4-11 Configuration of the OMBs
The AC OMB and DC OMB have different power equipment and use different surge protection
methods, which are implemented by different modules, as listed in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5 Components in the OMBs
No. Module/ Optional/ Maximum Description

Board Mandatory Quantity
Configured in
a Single
Cabinet
1 HEUA Mandatory 1 The HEUA

provides power
for the fan
assembly,
monitors the
status of the fan
assembly,
collects the
cabinet
environment
monitoring
information and
power surge
protection alarm
information,
and reports the
collected
information to
the BBU.

DBS3900

Configured in
a Single
Cabinet

installed in the 2
U space on the
left side of the
cabinet,
processing
baseband
signals.
3 AC surge Mandatory 1 The AC surge

protection box protection box
provides surge
protection for
the AC input
power.
4 AC/DC power Mandatory 1 The AC/DC

equipment power
equipment
converts 220 V
AC power to -48
V DC power.
5 DCDU-03B Mandatory 1 The

DCDU-03B
provides DC
power to all
components in
the cabinet.
Figure 4-12 shows the configuration of OMBs (Ver.C), including the AC OMB (Ver.C) and
DC OMB (Ver.C).

DBS3900
Figure 4-12 Configuration of the OMBs (Ver.C)
The AC OMB (Ver.C) and DC OMB (Ver.C) have different power equipment and use different
surge protection methods, which are implemented by different modules, as listed in Table 4-6.
Table 4-6 Components in the OMBs (Ver.C)

Configured in
a Single
Cabinet
1 ELU Mandatory 1 The ELU

automatically
reports the
cabinet type.
2 PMU 11A Mandatory 1 The PMU 11A

provides power
system, power
monitoring
function, and
alarm reporting
function.

DBS3900

Configured in
a Single
Cabinet
3 HEUB Mandatory 1 The HEUB

provides power
for the fan
assembly,
monitors the
status of the fan
assembly,
collects the
cabinet
environment
monitoring
information and
power surge
protection alarm
information,
and reports the
collected
information to
the BBU.
4 PSU Mandatory 2 The PSU

(R4850G2) converts 110 V/
220 V AC
power into -48
V DC.
5 BBU3900 Mandatory 1 The BBU3900

processes
baseband
signals and
enables
interaction
between the
base station and
base station
controller.

DBS3900

Configured in
a Single
Cabinet
6 Fan assembly Mandatory 2 The fan

assembly
dissipates heat
from the
cabinet. Two
fan assemblies
are separately
installed at the
left bottom and
the left top of the
OMB.
7 PDU10D-01 Mandatory 1 The

PDU10D-01 is a
DC power
distribution unit
supplying -48 V
DC power to all
components in
the cabinet.
8 SPD Mandatory 1 The SPD

provides surge
protection for
the AC input
power.
9 ETP48100-A1 Mandatory 1 The embedded

telecommunica-
tion power A1
(ETP48100-A1)
converts
external AC
input power into
DC power.
IMB03
The IMB03 is classified into the AC and DC IMB03, of which the configurations are shown in
Figure 4-13.

DBS3900
Figure 4-13 IMB03 cabinets
The AC IMB03 and DC IMB03 have different power equipment. Table 4-7 lists the components
configured in each IMB03 cabinet.
Table 4-7 Components in the IMB03 cabinet
Cabinet No. Module/ Optional or Maximum Descriptio

Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
AC IMB03 1 AC/DC Mandatory 1 The AC/DC

power power
equipment equipment
converts 220
V AC power
to -48 V DC
power.

installed in
the right 2 U
space of the
cabinet.
DC IMB03 1 DCDU-03B Mandatory 1 The

DCDU-03B
provides DC
power to all
components
in the
cabinet.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

installed in
the right 2 U
space of the
cabinet.
TP48600A
The TP48600A supports AC power input. Figure 4-14 shows the interior of the TP48600A.
Figure 4-14 Configurations of the TP48600A
Table 4-8 lists the components in the TP48600A.

DBS3900
Table 4-8 Components in the TP48600A

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
TP48600A 1 FAU02D-07 Mandatory 1 The

FAU02D-07
is a fan
assembly
unit used for
the
equipment
compartmen
t. It consists
of two fans
and a central
monitoring
unit type F
(CMUF).
The fans
dissipate
heat from the
cabinet.
The
FAU02D-07
is shortened
to FAU in
this
document.
2 CCU Mandatory 1 The cabinet

control unit
(CCU)
monitors the
operating
environment
of the cabinet
and controls
equipment.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with the
UELP or
UFLP is
mandatory.
The SLPU is
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
4 ETP Mandatory 1 The

embedded
telecommuni
cation power
(ETP)
system
converts AC
power into
DC power
and supplies
power to all
the
equipment
inside the
cabinet. The
ETP consists
of the ETP
subrack,
PMU, and
PSUs.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
5 R4850G2 Mandatory 7 The

R4850G2
converts 110
V AC or 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC power.
It is
shortened to
PSU in this
document.
6 PMU 10 A Mandatory 1 The power

monitoring
unit 10 A
(PMU 10 A)
provides the
following
functions:
power
system and
battery
management
, power
monitoring,
and alarm
reporting.
It is
shortened to
PMU in this
document.
7 DCDU-11C Mandatory 1 Direct

current
distribution
unit-11C
(DCDU-11C
) provides
ten DC
outputs for
the BBU,
CCU, and
CMUF in the
cabinet.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
8 BBU Mandatory 2 The

baseband
processing
unit
(BBU3900),
which
processes
baseband
signals, is
installed
under the
DCDU-11C.
9 DCDU-11B/ Mandatory 2 The

DCDU-03B DCDU-11B/
DCDU-03B
provides DC
power to
RRUs. When
only one
DCDU-11B/
DCDU-03B
is
configured,
it is
preferentiall
y configured
in the left
slot.
10 PDU05A-03 Mandatory 1 The

PDU05A-3
provides AC
power for the
ETP.
11 Storage Optional 8 The storage

battery battery
provides
backup
power for a
base station.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
12 CMUF Mandatory 1 The central

monitoring
unit type F
(CMUF)
provides the
following
functions:
heat
exchanger
control, fan
speed
adjustment,
and ELU
identificatio
n.
13 HAU Optional 2 The heater

assembly
unit (HAU)
ensures that
components
in the cabinet
work within
the
acceptable
temperature
range when
the
surrounding
temperature
is low. It is
optional.
14 Fan Mandatory 3 Fans

dissipate
heat from a
cabinet.

DBS3900

Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
15 Space for - - The space for

customer customer
equipment equipment is
5 U. It is
provided for
the SLPU,
EMUA, and
transmission
equipment.
16 Document Mandatory 1 The

holder document
holder is
used to hold
documents.
4.3 Engineering Specifications of Various Cabinets Used by

the DBS3900
This section describes the engineering specifications of various cabinets used by the DBS3900.
Engineering Specifications of the APM, TMC, and Battery Cabinets

For the engineering specifications of the APM30, TMC, and BBC, see Engineering
Specifications of the APM30. APM is short for advanced power module, TMC is short for
transmission cabinet, and BBC is short for battery backup cabinet.
For the engineering specifications of the APM30H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.A), and IBBS200T
(Ver.A), see Engineering Specifications of the APM30H. APM30H is short for advanced power
module with a heat exchanger, and TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heat
exchanger.
For the engineering specifications of the APM30H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), IBBS200T
(Ver.B), and IBBS200D (Ver.B), see Engineering Specifications of the APM30H, IBBS200T,
IBBS200D, and TMC11H.
For the engineering specifications of the APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.C), IBBS200T
(Ver.C), and IBBS200D (Ver.C), see Specifications of the APM30H, Specifications of the
TMC11H, Specifications of the IBBS200D, and Specifications of the IBBS200T, respectively.
For the engineering specifications of the APM30H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.D), IBBS200D
(Ver.D), and IBBS200T (Ver.D), see Technical Specifications of an APM30H, Technical
Specifications of a TMC11H, and Technical Specifications of an IBBS200D, and Technical
Specifications of an IBBS200T, respectively.

DBS3900
For details about the IBBS700D, see Engineering Specifications of the IBBS700D in
Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700D.
For details about the IBBS700T, see Engineering Specifications of the IBBS700T in Engineering
Specifications of an IBBS700T.
Engineering Specifications of the OMB and OMB (Ver.C)

Table 4-9 lists the engineering specifications of the outdoor mini box (OMB).
Table 4-9 Engineering specifications of the OMB
Item Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D) 600 mm x 240 mm x 390 mm (23.62 in. x 9.45

in. x 15.35 in.)
Weight OMB subrack: ≤ 15 kg (33.08 lb)

AC OMB: ≤ 25 kg (55.13 lb)
DC OMB: ≤ 22.5 kg (49.61 lb)
Ambient temperature Without solar radiation: -40oC to +50oC

(-40oF to +122oF)
Short-term operation: 50oC to 55oC (122oF to
131oF)
NOTE
Short-term operation indicates that the continuous
operation time does not exceed 96 hours or the
accumulated operation time within a year does not
exceed 15 days.
Relative humidity 5% RH to 100% RH
Table 4-10 lists the engineering specifications of the OMB (Ver.C).
Table 4-10 Engineering specifications of the OMB (Ver.C)
Item Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D) 600 mm x 240 mm x 430 mm (23.62 in. x 9.45

in. x 16.93 in.)
Weight AC OMB: ≤ 30 kg (66.14 lb)

DC OMB: ≤ 21 kg (46.30 lb)
Ambient temperature -27.4 oF to 122 oF

NOTE
The temperature alarm lower threshold is -33oC
(-27.4oF).

DBS3900
Item Specifications
Relative humidity 5% RH to 100% RH
Engineering Specifications of the IMB03

Table 4-11 lists the engineering specifications of the IMB03. IMB is short for indoor mini box.
Table 4-11 Engineering Specifications of the IMB03
Item Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D) 560 mm x 425 mm x 180 mm (22.05 in. x

16.73 in. x 7.09 in.)
Weight 10 kg (22.05 lb)
Ambient temperature -4oF to 122oF
4.4 Components in DBS3900 Cabinets

This section describes the components in various DBS3900 cabinets.
4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, and Battery Cabinet

This section describes the components in the APM, TMC, and battery cabinet.
For the components in the APM30, TMC, and battery cabinet, see the APM30&BBC&TMC User
Guide.
For the components in the APM30H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.A), and battery cabinet, see the
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide.
For the components in the APM30H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), and battery cabinet, see the
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.B) Product Description.
For the components in the APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.C), and battery cabinet, see the
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.C) Product Description.
For the components in the APM30H(Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.D), and battery cabinets, see the
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.D) Product Description.
For details about the exterior, functions, specifications, and components of the IBBS700D and
IBBS700T, see IBBS700D&IBBS700T User Guide.
4.4.2 Components in the OMB

This section describes the components in the OMB configured for the DBS3900.

DBS3900
HEUA
The Heat Exchange Unit Type A (HEUA) monitors the fans and reports the related alarms.
Structure
The HEUA is the heat exchange monitoring unit. Figure 4-15 shows the HEUA.
Figure 4-15 HEUA
Ports
Figure 4-16 shows the ports on the HEUA, and Table 4-12 describes the ports on the HEUA.
Figure 4-16 Ports on the HEUA
Table 4-12 Ports on the HEUA
SN Port Quantity Function
1 3V3 power supply 1 Leading DC input

port power to the HEUA

DBS3900
SN Port Quantity Function
2 and 3 4-pin sockets 2 Providing the

terminals for the
power or alarm
signals of the two
outer air circulation
fans
4 LEDs 2 Indicating the

running status and
alarm status of the
fans
5 and 6 RJ45 ports 2 two RS485 signals

l COM OUT:
connecting to the
PMU or lower-
level HEUA
l COM IN:
connecting to the
BBU or upper-
level HEUA
7 Short-circuiting cap 1 Differentiating the

APM30H or
TMC11H from other
cabinets
8 and 9 4-pin sockets 2 Providing the

terminals for the
power or alarm
signals of the two
inner air circulation
fans
AC/DC Power Equipment

The AC/DC power equipment consists of a 4815 power system and a DC power distribution
box with two outputs. The equipment leads 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, converts the
220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supplies -48 V DC power
to the components in the cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 4-17 shows the AC/DC power equipment.

DBS3900
Figure 4-17 AC/DC power equipment
(1) AC power supply socket (2) Wiring terminal for the RRU
(3) Wiring terminal for the transmission equipment (4) Power switch for the RRU
(5) Power switch for the transmission equipment (6) PSU
(7) Monitoring ports (8) DC output port (LOAD1)
(9) DC output port (LOAD2) (10) Output port (BATT) for the batteries
Port
Table 4-13 describes the ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-13 Ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment
Port Type Label Description Connector
AC power INPUT AC input port 3-pin male connector

supply socket
Monitoring RS232 Reserved -

port
RS485 Monitoring port for the PSU RJ45 connector
COM Reserved -
DC output port LOAD1 Power port (10 A) for the H4

BBU and HEUA
LOAD2 Power port (20 A) for the H4

transmission equipment
BATT Power port (20 A) for the H4

batteries
DC output RRU Wiring terminal for feeding OT terminal

wiring power (12 A) into the RRU
terminals power cable
TM Wiring terminal for feeding OT terminal

power (4 A) into the

DBS3900
Indicator
Table 4-14 describes the indicators on the panel of the PSU in the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-14 Indicators on the panel of the PSU
Label Color Name Status Description
RUN Green Running status Steady on The module is running properly.

indicator
Steady off An error occurs during the running
of the module.
ALARM Yellow Alarm indicator Steady on An output overcurrent alarm or

overtemperature alarm is
generated.
Blinking The communication is interrupted.
Steady off The module is running properly.
FAULT Red Fault indicator Steady on A fan fault, output overvoltage, or

external short circuit occurs.
Table 4-15 describes the indicators on the panel of the monitoring module in the AC/DC power
equipment.
Table 4-15 Indicators on the panel of the monitoring module
RUN Green Running status Blinking (on The module is running properly.
indicator for 1s and off
for 1s)
Blinking (on The module is functional but

for 0.125s unable to communicate with the
and off for PMU properly.
0.125s)
ALM Red Alarm indicator Steady on An alarm is generated.
Steady off No alarms is generated.
DIP Switch
Figure 4-18 shows the DIP switches.

DBS3900
Figure 4-18 DIP Switches
Table 4-16 describes the settings of the DIP switches.
Table 4-16 Settings of the DIP switches
No. Function Setting
1 to 5 Used to define the (1) 1 to 5 correspond to Bit0

communication address of to Bit4, respectively. ON
the PMU. indicates 1, and OFF
indicates 0.
For example, if the
communication address of
the PMU is 3, 1 and 2 are set
to ON, and 3, 4, and 5 are set
to OFF.
(2) The default settings are as
follows:
1 (Bit0) is set to ON;
3 (Bit2) is set to OFF;
5 (Bit4) is set to OFF.

DBS3900
6 Selects a baud rate for When 6 is set to ON, the baud

communicating with the rate is 9600 bit/s. When 6 is
main control unit. set to OFF, the baud rate is
19200 bit/s.
7 and 8 Reserved and undefined. 7 and 8 are set to OFF.
Specifications
Table 4-17 describes the specifications of the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-17 Specifications of the AC/DC power equipment
Item Specifications
Input voltage 220 V AC single-phase voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 V

AC
110 V AC dual-live-wire voltage range: 90/180 V AC to
135/270 V AC
Frequency of the input 45 Hz to 65 Hz

voltage
Output voltage Voltage range: -42 V DC to -58 V DC
Output current 15 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power

7.5 A for the 110 V AC dual-live-wire input power
Surge protection capability 2 kV in differential mode

4 kV in common mode
AC Surge Protection Box

The AC surge protection box provides surge protection for the input AC power.
Exterior
Figure 4-19 shows the panel of the AC surge protection box.

DBS3900
Figure 4-19 Panel of the AC surge protection box
(1) Alarm port (2) Wiring terminals for the AC input power cables
Port
Table 4-18 describes the ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box.
Table 4-18 Ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box
Name Label Description Connector
Alarm port SPD ALM Port for reporting the (2) 2-Pin cord end
AC input surge terminal
protection alarm
Wiring terminals for L Wiring terminal for OT terminal

the input power the AC input power
cables N cable
PE
DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C) supplies DC power to each
component in the cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C is 1 U. It can be classified

DBS3900
into the DCDU-03B and DCDU-03C according to the configured circuit breakers and application
scenarios. The two models have the same exterior and engineering specifications.
Exterior
Figure 4-20 shows the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Figure 4-20 DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Functions
The DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C provides nine -48 V DC outputs and different circuit breaker
configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of the scenarios of distributed and
separated base stations.
Table 4-19 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Table 4-19 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
DCDU DC Output Power circuit circuit Applicatio

Model Terminal Consumpti breaker breaker n Scenario
on Specificati Quantity
Equipment on
DCDU-03B LOAD0 to RRU 20 A 6 Distributed

LOAD5 base station/
Mini base
LOAD6 to BBU and the 12 A 3 station
LOAD8 transmission
equipment of
the customer
DCDU-03C LOAD0 to Transmissio 12 A 6 Separated

LOAD5 n equipment macro base
of the station in the
customer -48 V DC
power
LOAD6 BBU 12 A 1 supply/

DBS3900

Equipment on
LOAD7 Transmissio 6A 1 Transmissio

n equipment n cabinet
of the
customer
LOAD8 Fan box 6A 1
Ports
Figure 4-21 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Figure 4-21 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Table 4-20 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Table 4-20 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Port Specification Power Cable Cross- Remarks

Sectional Area
DC input Supports the Maximum = 25mm2, When the DCDU-03C is used

terminal M6 2-hole OT default = 16mm2, in the transmission cabinet,
terminal (one the cross-sectional area of the
input) input power cable is 4 mm2.

DBS3900

Sectional Area
DC output Supports the Maximum = 6mm2 l The specification for a

terminal M4 single hole power cable depends on
OT terminal (9 the device to which the
outputs) cable is connected. For
example, the specification
for a fan power cable is 2.5
mm2.
l Three rows of wiring
terminals for outputs:
NEG(-), RTN(+), and
PGND, where, the last
three pairs of the PGND
wiring terminals support
the grounding of the M4 2-
hole OT terminals, which
are marked in red in
Figure 4-21
SPD ALM SPD ALM - This port is unavailable.
Technical Specifications
Table 4-21 describes the technical specifications of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Table 4-21 Technical Specifications of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Item Specification
Dimension (H x W x D) The DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C is 1 U (44.45

mm or 1.75 in.) high and can be installed in a
19 inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as
follows:
l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x
17.4 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting
ears)
l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x
19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)
Surge protection specifications of ports on -48 V DC port, differential mode: 10kA

DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C (8/20μs)
-48 V DC port, common mode: 20kA

(8/20μs)

DBS3900
4.4.3 Components in the OMB (Ver.C)

This section describes the components in the OMB (Ver.C) configured for the DBS3900.OMB
is short for outdoor mini box.
HEUB
The heat exchange unit type B (HEUB) provides power for the fan assembly, monitors the status
of the fan assembly, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge
protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
Panel
Figure 4-22 shows the HEUB panel.
Figure 4-22 HEUB panel
(1) ELU (2) ExtFAN (3) IntFAN
(4) TEM (5) AC_SPD (6) GATE
(7) COM_IN (8) COM_OUT (9) PWR
Functions
The HEUB performs the following functions:
l Provides -48 V DC power to the fan assembly.
l Collects the cabinet environment monitoring information.
l Collects the surge protection alarm information of power equipment when AC power is
used.
l Monitors the running status of fans and supports fan speed adjustment based on temperature
or controlled by the BBU.

DBS3900
l Reports collected information to the BBU.
Ports
Table 4-22 describes the ports on the HEUB.
Table 4-22 Ports on the HEUB
ELU RJ45 connector Electronic label port
ExtFAN 4-pin connector Power port for the outer air

circulation fan
IntFAN 4-pin connector Power port for the inner air

circulation fan
TEM 4-pin connector Port connected to the

temperature sensor
AC_SPD Bare wire Port for collecting the AC

input surge protection alarm
GATE Bare wire Port for the door status sensor
COM_IN RJ45 connector Port for reporting monitoring

signals
COM_OUT RJ45 connector Port connected to the

ETP48100-A1
PWR 3V3 power connector -48 V DC input port
ETP48100-A1
The embedded telecommunication power A1 (ETP48100-A1) converts external 220 V or 110
V AC input power into -48 V DC power.
ETP48100-A1 Components
The embedded telecommunication power 48100-A1 (ETP48100-A1) system consists of the
power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A), power supply unit (PSU), and ETP48100-A1 subrack.
Figure 4-23 shows the ETP48100-A1 components.

DBS3900
Figure 4-23 ETP48100-A1 components
(1) PMU 11A (2) PSU (3) ETP48100-A1 subrack
ETP48100-A1 Subrack
The embedded telecommunication power 48100-A1 (ETP48100-A1) subrack houses the PMU
11A and PSU. It also distributes AC input power and DC output power.
Exterior
Figure 4-24 shows an ETP48100-A1 subrack.
Figure 4-24 ETP48100-A1 subrack
(1) AC input terminal (2) Circuit breaker (3) DC output terminal
Table 4-23 describes the ports on an ETP48100-A1 subrack.
Table 4-23 Ports on an ETP48100-A1 subrack
Port Silkscreen Connector
AC input terminal INPUT OT terminal
Circuit breaker LOAD0/LOAD1 -
DC output terminal OUTPUT OT terminal

DBS3900
PMU 11A
The power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A) manages the power system, monitors power
distribution, and reports alarms.
Exterior
Figure 4-25 shows a PMU 11A.
Figure 4-25 PMU 11A
Functions
The PMU 11A performs the following functions:
l Manages the power system.
l Reports the battery temperature.
l Monitors power distribution and reports alarms.
Ports
Figure 4-26 shows the ports on the PMU 11A and Table 4-24 describes these ports.
Figure 4-26 Ports on the PMU 11A

DBS3900
Table 4-24 Ports on the PMU 11A
No. Silkscreen Connector Description
1 GATE 2-pin connector Connects to a door status

sensor
2 TEM_BAT 2-pin connector Reserved for a battery

temperature sensor
3 COM_IN RJ45 connector Connects to the BBU or

upper-level device and
reports alarms to the
BBU.
4 COM_OUT RJ45 connector Connects to the BBU or

lower-level devices and
collects alarms from
lower-level devices.
5 COM_485 RJ45 connector Reserved
Indicators
Table 4-25 describes the indicators on the PMU 11A.
Table 4-25 Indicators on the PMU 11A
Silkscre Color Description Status Description

en
RUN Green Running status Steady on The PMU 11A is performing

indicator startup, self-check, loading and
activation.
Blinking (on The PMU 11A is functional and

for 1s and off communicating with the BBU
for 1s) properly. (This status does not
necessarily mean that the PMU
11A has been configured.)
Blinking (on The PMU 11A is functional but

for 0.125s unable to communicate properly.
and off for
0.125s)
Steady off The PMU 11A is faulty or there is

no DC power supply.

DBS3900
Silkscre Color Description Status Description

en
Blinking (on An alarm is generated and you need

for 1s and off to locate the fault before deciding
for 1s) whether to replace the PMU 11A.
DIP Switches
Figure 4-27 shows the DIP switches on the PMU 11A.
Figure 4-27 DIP switches on the PMU 11A
DIP Bit Function Setting
Four least Define the The bit 1 indicates ON, and the bit 0 indicates OFF. Bits
significan monitoring address 1 to 4 are set to 1100 by default before delivery.
t bits (1, of the PMU.
2, 3, and
4)
Four most Reserved for future The bit 1 indicates ON, and the bit 0 indicates OFF. Bits
significan use. 5 to 8 are set to 0000 by default before delivery.
t bits (5,
6, 7, and
8)
PSU
The power supply unit (PSU) converts 110 V or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.

DBS3900
Functions
The PSU implements the following functions:
l Converts 110 V or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. The power monitoring unit
(PMU) adjusts the output voltage.
l Provides protection against overcurrent, overvoltage, and overheat.
l Dissipates heat using built-in fans.
Exterior
Figure 4-28 shows the PSU exterior.
Figure 4-28 PSU exterior
NOTE
A scanner is required for stock management to scan the two-dimensional bar code on the front panel of the
PSU.
Indicators
Figure 4-29 shows the indicators on the front panel of the PSU.
Figure 4-29 Indicators on the front panel of the PSU
(1) Power indicator (2) Protection indicator (3) Fault indicator
Table 4-27 describes the indicators on the front panel of the PSU.

DBS3900
Table 4-27 Indicators on the front panel of the PSU
Indicat Color Status Description

or
Power Green Steady on The PSU is functioning properly.

indicato
r Steady off The PSU is experiencing a mains supply
fault, or the PSU is faulty.
Protecti Yellow Steady off The PSU is functioning properly.

on
indicato Steady on An alarm triggered by an external factor is
r generated.
Blinking (on for 1s and The communication between the PSU and the
off for 1s) PMU is interrupted.
Fault Red Steady off The PSU is functioning properly.

indicato
r Steady on The PSU is faulty or shut down in case of an
emergency. Diagnose the fault to determine
whether to replace the PSU.
PDU10D-01
The power distribution unit 10D-01 (PDU10D-01) distributes -48 V DC power to all components
in the cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 4-30 shows a PDU10D-01.
Figure 4-30 PDU10D-01

DBS3900
Functions
The PDU10D-01 performs the following functions:
l Supports a maximum of two -48 V DC inputs and a maximum of 160 A input current.
l Provides ten DC outputs with six for the RRUs, one for the BBU, one for the HEUB, and
two reserved.
Ports
Figure 4-31 shows ports on the PDU10D-01 and Table 4-28 describes these ports.
Figure 4-31 Ports on the PDU10D-01
Table 4-28 Ports on the PDU10D-01
No Port Silkscreen Matched Description

. Terminal and
Cable
1 DC input NEG(-) One-hole OT Negative power input wiring

terminals terminal (M6). The terminal
maximum cross-
RTN(+) sectional area of the Positive power input wiring
cable supported is terminal
25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)
for one input or 16
mm2 (0.025 in.2) for
two inputs.

DBS3900
No Port Silkscreen Matched Description

. Terminal and
Cable
2 AC input L, N, PE One-hole OT The maximum input current

terminals terminal (M4). The for a single input is 30 A.
maximum cross-
sectional area of the
cable supported is 4
mm2 (0.0062 2).
3 DC output LOAD0 to Figure 4-32 shows The output current is 30 A.

terminals LOAD5 the EPC5
connectors for ports
LOAD0 to LOAD5.
The maximum
cross-sectional area
of the cable is 10
mm2 (0.016 in.2).
4 DC output LOAD6 to Figure 4-33 shows The output current is 30 A.

terminals LOAD9 an EPC4 connector,
which applies to any
one among ports
LOAD6 to LOAD9.
The maximum
of the cable is 4
mm2 (0.006 in.2).
NOTE
Figure 4-33 shows
an EPC4 connector.
An EPC4 connector
must be connected to
a cable onsite. The
EPC5 connector
the cable onsite.
5 Spare fuse - - There are three fuses in the

box spare fuse box:
l Two 5 A spare fuses, each
used for transferring
power less than 150 W.
l One 30 A spare fuse, used
for the 30 A output power
ports on the PDU10D-01.

DBS3900
Figure 4-32 Exterior of an EPC5 connector
AC Surge Protection Box

The AC surge protection box provides surge protection for the input AC power.
Exterior
Figure 4-34 shows the panel of an AC surge protection box.
Figure 4-34 Panel of the AC surge protection box
(1) AC surge protection box (2) Alarm port (3) AC power supply ports

DBS3900
Ports
Table 4-29 describes the ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box.
Table 4-29 Ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box
Port Type Silkscreen Connector Description
Port for alarm ALARM Bare wire Port for collecting

reporting the AC input surge
protection alarm
AC power supply L Cord end terminal AC power supply

port port
N
PE
4.4.4 Components in the IMB03

This section describes the components in the IMB03 configured for the DBS3900.
AC/DC Power Equipment

The AC/DC power equipment consists of a 4815 power system and a DC power distribution
box with two outputs. The equipment leads 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, converts the
220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supplies -48 V DC power
to the components in the cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 4-35 shows the AC/DC power equipment.
Figure 4-35 AC/DC power equipment
(1) AC power supply socket (2) Wiring terminal for the RRU
(3) Wiring terminal for the transmission equipment (4) Power switch for the RRU
(5) Power switch for the transmission equipment (6) PSU
(7) Monitoring ports (8) DC output port (LOAD1)
(9) DC output port (LOAD2) (10) Output port (BATT) for the batteries

DBS3900
Port
Table 4-30 describes the ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-30 Ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment
Port Type Label Description Connector
AC power INPUT AC input port 3-pin male connector

supply socket
Monitoring RS232 Reserved -

port
RS485 Monitoring port for the PSU RJ45 connector
COM Reserved -
DC output port LOAD1 Power port (10 A) for the H4

BBU and HEUA
LOAD2 Power port (20 A) for the H4

BATT Power port (20 A) for the H4

batteries
DC output RRU Wiring terminal for feeding OT terminal

wiring power (12 A) into the RRU
terminals power cable
TM Wiring terminal for feeding OT terminal

power (4 A) into the
Indicator
Table 4-31 describes the indicators on the panel of the PSU in the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-31 Indicators on the panel of the PSU
RUN Green Running status Steady on The module is running properly.

indicator
Steady off An error occurs during the running
of the module.
ALARM Yellow Alarm indicator Steady on An output overcurrent alarm or

overtemperature alarm is
generated.

DBS3900
Blinking The communication is interrupted.
FAULT Red Fault indicator Steady on A fan fault, output overvoltage, or

external short circuit occurs.
Table 4-32 describes the indicators on the panel of the monitoring module in the AC/DC power
equipment.
Table 4-32 Indicators on the panel of the monitoring module
RUN Green Running status Blinking (on The module is running properly.
indicator for 1s and off
for 1s)
Blinking (on The module is functional but

for 0.125s unable to communicate with the
and off for PMU properly.
0.125s)
DIP Switch
Figure 4-36 shows the DIP switches.

DBS3900
Figure 4-36 DIP Switches
1 to 5 Used to define the (1) 1 to 5 correspond to Bit0

communication address of to Bit4, respectively. ON
the PMU. indicates 1, and OFF
indicates 0.
For example, if the
communication address of
the PMU is 3, 1 and 2 are set
to ON, and 3, 4, and 5 are set
to OFF.
(2) The default settings are as
follows:
5 (Bit4) is set to OFF.

DBS3900
6 Selects a baud rate for When 6 is set to ON, the baud

communicating with the rate is 9600 bit/s. When 6 is
main control unit. set to OFF, the baud rate is
19200 bit/s.
7 and 8 Reserved and undefined. 7 and 8 are set to OFF.
Specifications
Table 4-34 describes the specifications of the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-34 Specifications of the AC/DC power equipment
Item Specifications
Input voltage 220 V AC single-phase voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 V

AC
110 V AC dual-live-wire voltage range: 90/180 V AC to
135/270 V AC
Frequency of the input 45 Hz to 65 Hz

voltage
Output voltage Voltage range: -42 V DC to -58 V DC
Output current 15 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power

7.5 A for the 110 V AC dual-live-wire input power
Surge protection capability 2 kV in differential mode

4 kV in common mode
DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Exterior

DBS3900
Functions

Equipment on

LOAD5 base station/
Mini base
LOAD8 transmission
equipment of
the customer

customer -48 V DC
power
of the
customer
LOAD8 Fan box 6A 1

DBS3900
Ports

Sectional Area


DBS3900

Sectional Area

mm2.
NEG(-), RTN(+), and
Figure 4-38
Item Specification

follows:
l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x
ears)
l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x


(8/20μs)

DBS3900
DCDU-12B
A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) is 1 U high and provides DC power for all
components in the cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 4-39 and Figure 4-40 show exterior of a DCDU-12B.
Figure 4-39 Front view of a DCDU-12B
(1) DC input terminal (2) DC output terminal (3) Spare fuse box (4) Ground point
Figure 4-40 Rear view of a DCDU-12B
(1) Ground point
NOTE
The DCDU-12B uses the equipotential connection point and ground point in the following scenarios:
l Scenario 1: The DCDU-12B is installed on an open subrack. An equipotential cable connects the
equipotential connection point near the mounting ear of the DCDU-12B to the ground bar of the open
rack.
l Scenario 2: The DCDU-12B is installed on a wall as a standalone power distribution device. The ground
point at the rear of the DCDU-12B is connected to the ground bar in the cabinet.
Functions
The DCDU-12B provides ten -48 V DC outputs using same fuse configurations to meet the
power distribution requirements of different distributed base stations.
Table 4-38 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B.

DBS3900
Table 4-38 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B
DCDU Type DC output Power- Specificatio Remarks

ports Consuming n of the
Device Fuse
DCDU-12B LOAD0 to RRU0 to RRU5 30 A l BTS3900

LOAD5 l BTS3900A
LOAD6 BBU or l DBS3900
transmission l Mini NodeB
device
LOAD7 BBU or
transmission
device
LOAD8 EMUA or
transmission
device
LOAD9 Fan assembly
NOTE
It is recommended that the power output terminals on the DCDU-12B be connected as follows:
l The LOAD0 to LOAD5 terminals are connected to cables with a cross-sectional area of 3.3mm2 (0.005
in.2) to 10mm2 (0.015 in.2) to provide power for RRU 0 to RRU 5.
in.2) to 4mm2(0.006 in.2) to provide power for RRU 6 to RRU 8.
l The LOAD9 terminal is reserved.
Ports
Figure 4-41 shows the ports on the DCDU-12B panel.
Figure 4-41 Ports on the DCDU-12B panel

DBS3900
Table 4-39 shows the terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel.
Table 4-39 Terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel
N Port Silkscreen Matched Terminal Remarks

o. and Cable
(1) DC input NEG(-) One-hole OT Negative power input wiring

terminals terminal (M6) with terminal
two inputs. The
RTN(+) maximum cross- Positive power input wiring
sectional area of the terminal
cable is 35 mm2
(0.054 in.2) in one
input or 25 mm2
(0.039 in.2)in two
inputs. The default
is 16 mm2 (0.025 in.
2).
(2) Fuse LOAD0 to - It controls ports LOAD0 to

block LOAD9 LOAD9, and therefore controls
the power supplies to the BBU,
fan assemblies, and
transmission equipment.
The indicator on the fuse block
indicates the status of the fuse.
l When the indicator is steady
on, the fuse is faulty and
needs to be replaced.
off, the fuse is working
properly.

DBS3900

o. and Cable
(3) DC LOAD0 to l Figure 4-42 For the specifications of the DC

output LOAD9 shows the EPC5 output, see Table 4-38.
ports connector for
ports LOAD0 to
LOAD5. The
cross-sectional
area of the cable is
3.3mm2 (0.005 in.
2) to 10mm2
(0.015 in.2).
l Figure 4-43
shows the EPC4
connector for
ports LOAD6 to
LOAD9. The
cross-sectional
1.5mm2 (0.002 in.
2) to 4mm2(0.006
in.2).
NOTE
The EPC4 connector
and EPC5 connector
the cable onsite.
(4) Spare - - There are three 30 A spare fuses

fuse box in the spare fuse box.
NOTE
Fuse blocks and DC output terminals are jointly called fuse terminal blocks.

DBS3900
Table 4-40 lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12B.
Table 4-40 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12B
Item Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D) The DCDU-12B is 1 U high and can be

installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its
dimensions are as follows:
l 42 mm x 442 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 17.4
in. x 2.56 in.) (without mounting ears)
l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x
Surge Protection Specifications -48 V DC power port, 10 kA (8/20 μs)

differential mode
-48 V DC power port, 20 kA (8/20 μs)

common mode
4.4.5 Components Used for Installation on a Wall or 19-inch Rack

This section describes the components to be used for installing the BBU3900 on a wall or 19-
inch rack.
DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Exterior

DBS3900
Functions

Equipment on

LOAD5 base station/
Mini base
LOAD8 transmission
equipment of
the customer

customer -48 V DC
power
of the
customer
LOAD8 Fan box 6A 1

DBS3900
Ports

Sectional Area


DBS3900

Sectional Area

mm2.
NEG(-), RTN(+), and
Figure 4-45
Item Specification

follows:
l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x
ears)
l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x


(8/20μs)

DBS3900
DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C

The DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C are 1 U-high direct current distribution units, which supply
power to each component in the cabinet. They have the same exterior, engineering specifications,
and ports but different circuit breaker specifications and usage scenarios.
Exterior
Figure 4-46 and Figure 4-47 show the front and rear views of a DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
respectively.
Figure 4-46 Front view of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
Figure 4-47 Rear view of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C

DBS3900
NOTE
The DCDU-11C does not use the equipotential connection point and ground point. The DCDU-11B uses
the equipotential connection point or ground point only in one of the following scenarios:
l Scenario 1: The DCDU-11B is placed in an open rack and is connected to the ground bar of the open
rack by using the equipotential connection point near the mounting ears.
l Scenario 2: The DCDU-11B is mounted on a wall to serve as an independent power distribution device,
which is connected to the ground bar in the equipment room by using the ground point at the rear of
the DCDU-11B.
Function
The DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C provides ten -48 V DC outputs. Different circuit breaker
configurations can meet power distribution requirements for a distributed or outdoor macro base
station.
Table 4-44 lists the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.
DCDU DC Equipment Circuit Circuit Description

Type Output Breaker Breaker
Termina Specifica
l tions
DCDU-11 LOAD0 RRU0 to RRU5 25 A SW0 to Distributed or

B to SW5 mini base station
LOAD5
LOAD6 BBU or transmission 25 A SW6

equipment

equipment
LOAD8 EMUA or 25 A SW8

transmission
equipment
LOAD9 Fan assembly 25 A SW9
DCDU-11 LOAD0 Transmission 6A SW0 -48 V outdoor

C equipment macro base
station or
LOAD1 Transmission 6A SW1 transmission
equipment cabinet
LOAD2 Transmission 12 A SW2
equipment

equipment

equipment

DBS3900
DCDU DC Equipment Circuit Circuit Description

Type Output Breaker Breaker
Termina Specifica
l tions

equipment

equipment

equipment
LOAD8 EMUA or 25 A SW8

transmission
equipment
LOAD9 Fan assembly 25 A SW9
Ports
Figure 4-48 shows the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.
Table 4-45 describes specifications of the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.

DBS3900
Table 4-45 Specifications of the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
S Port Label Terminal and Description

N Cable

terminal terminal (M6) with terminal
two inputs. The
cable is 35mm2
(0.054 in.2) in one
input or 25mm2
(0.039in.2) in two
inputs.

DBS3900
S Port Label Terminal and Description

N Cable
(2) DC LOAD0 to DCDU-11B: For details about DC output

output LOAD9 l Figure 4-49 specifications, see Table 4-44.
terminal shows an tool-
less female
connector
(pressfit type)
adapting to
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
terminals. The
cross-sectional
area is 3.3mm2
(0.005 in.2) to
10mm2 (0.015 in.
2).
l Figure 4-50
shows an tool-
less female
connector
(pressfit type)
adapting to
LOAD6 to
LOAD9
terminals. The
maximum cross-
sectional area is
1.5mm2 (0.002 in.
2) to 4mm2(0.006
in.2).
DCDU-11C: Figure
4-50 shows an tool-
less female connector
(pressfit type)
adapting to LOAD0
to LOAD9 terminals.
The cross-sectional
area is 1.5mm2
(0.002 in.2) to 4mm2
(0.006 in.2).
(3) Circuit SW0 to SW9 - The circuit breakers SW0 to

breaker SW9 control the ports LOAD0
to LOAD9 respectively,
controlling the power supplies
to the BBU, fan assembly, and

DBS3900
Figure 4-49 tool-less female connector (pressfit type) (1)
Figure 4-50 tool-less female connector (pressfit type) (2)
Table 4-46 describes the technical specifications of the DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C.
Table 4-46 Technical Specifications of the DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C
Item Specification

follows:
l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x
ears)
l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x

DCDU-11B or DCDU-11C (8/20μs)

(8/20μs)

DBS3900
DCDU-12B
A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) is 1 U high and provides DC power for all
Exterior
Figure 4-51 and Figure 4-52 show exterior of a DCDU-12B.
Figure 4-51 Front view of a DCDU-12B
(1) DC input terminal (2) DC output terminal (3) Spare fuse box (4) Ground point
Figure 4-52 Rear view of a DCDU-12B
(1) Ground point
NOTE
The DCDU-12B uses the equipotential connection point and ground point in the following scenarios:
l Scenario 1: The DCDU-12B is installed on an open subrack. An equipotential cable connects the
equipotential connection point near the mounting ear of the DCDU-12B to the ground bar of the open
rack.
l Scenario 2: The DCDU-12B is installed on a wall as a standalone power distribution device. The ground
point at the rear of the DCDU-12B is connected to the ground bar in the cabinet.
Functions
The DCDU-12B provides ten -48 V DC outputs using same fuse configurations to meet the
power distribution requirements of different distributed base stations.
Table 4-47 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B.

DBS3900
Table 4-47 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B
DCDU Type DC output Power- Specificatio Remarks

ports Consuming n of the
Device Fuse
DCDU-12B LOAD0 to RRU0 to RRU5 30 A l BTS3900

LOAD5 l BTS3900A
LOAD6 BBU or l DBS3900
transmission l Mini NodeB
device
LOAD7 BBU or
transmission
device
LOAD8 EMUA or
transmission
device
LOAD9 Fan assembly
NOTE
It is recommended that the power output terminals on the DCDU-12B be connected as follows:
in.2) to 10mm2 (0.015 in.2) to provide power for RRU 0 to RRU 5.
in.2) to 4mm2(0.006 in.2) to provide power for RRU 6 to RRU 8.
l The LOAD9 terminal is reserved.
Ports
Figure 4-53 shows the ports on the DCDU-12B panel.
Figure 4-53 Ports on the DCDU-12B panel

DBS3900
Table 4-48 shows the terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel.
Table 4-48 Terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel

o. and Cable

terminals terminal (M6) with terminal
two inputs. The
cable is 35 mm2
(0.054 in.2) in one
input or 25 mm2
(0.039 in.2)in two
inputs. The default
is 16 mm2 (0.025 in.
2).
(2) Fuse LOAD0 to - It controls ports LOAD0 to

block LOAD9 LOAD9, and therefore controls
the power supplies to the BBU,
fan assemblies, and
The indicator on the fuse block
indicates the status of the fuse.
on, the fuse is faulty and
needs to be replaced.
off, the fuse is working
properly.

DBS3900

o. and Cable
(3) DC LOAD0 to l Figure 4-54 For the specifications of the DC

output LOAD9 shows the EPC5 output, see Table 4-47.
ports connector for
ports LOAD0 to
LOAD5. The
cross-sectional
3.3mm2 (0.005 in.
2) to 10mm2
(0.015 in.2).
l Figure 4-55
shows the EPC4
connector for
ports LOAD6 to
LOAD9. The
cross-sectional
1.5mm2 (0.002 in.
2) to 4mm2(0.006
in.2).
NOTE
The EPC4 connector
and EPC5 connector
the cable onsite.
(4) Spare - - There are three 30 A spare fuses

fuse box in the spare fuse box.
NOTE
Fuse blocks and DC output terminals are jointly called fuse terminal blocks.

DBS3900
Table 4-49 lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12B.
Table 4-49 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12B
Item Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D) The DCDU-12B is 1 U high and can be

installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its
dimensions are as follows:
l 42 mm x 442 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 17.4
in. x 2.56 in.) (without mounting ears)
l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x
Surge Protection Specifications -48 V DC power port, 10 kA (8/20 μs)

differential mode
-48 V DC power port, 20 kA (8/20 μs)

common mode
4.5 Engineering Specifications of Internal Equipment

The equipment in the various DBS3900 cabinets must meet the requirements for engineering
specifications.
The equipment installed in the APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), TMC, and TMC11H (Ver.A) must
meet the following requirements for engineering specifications:
l Dimensions (as shown in Figure 4-56)
– Width: 19 inches
– Depth: less than or equal to 310 mm (12.2 in.) for the equipment using natural ventilation
or dissipating heat out from its left and right; less than 280 mm (11.02 in.) for the
equipment dissipating heat out from its front and rear.
– Cabling space in front of the front panel: less than or equal to 70 mm (2.76 in.)
l Requirement for air vents:

DBS3900
– If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must have air vents on the right
and left or on the front and back so that wind blows from left to right or from front to
back.
– If the customer equipment supports natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U slot must be
reserved above and below the slot respectively for dissipation.
l Requirement for temperature:
Table 4-50 Temperature requirements for user equipment
Highest Environmental Lowest Operating Highest Operating

Temperature Temperature of the User Temperature of the User
Equipment Equipment
Equal to or lower than 40° Equal to or lower than -10° Equal to or higher than 55°
C C C
Higher than 40°C Equal to or lower than -10° Equal to or higher than 60°
C C
Figure 4-56 Requirements for the dimensions and heat dissipation of the internal equipment
(1) Equipment using natural (2) Equipment dissipating heat out (3) Equipment dissipating heat out
ventilation from its left and right from its front and rear
The equipment installed in the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.B), and
TMC11H (Ver.C) must meet the following requirements for engineering specifications:
l Dimensions (as shown in Figure 4-56)
– Width: 19 inch

DBS3900
– Depth: less than or equal to 280 mm (11.02 in.) for the equipment using natural
ventilation or dissipating heat out from its left and right; less than 250 mm (9.84 in.) for
the equipment dissipating heat out from its front and rear.
– Cabling space in front of the front panel: less than or equal to 100 mm (3.94 in.)
l Requirement for air vents:
– If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must have air vents on the right
and left or on the front and back so that wind blows from left to right or from front to
back.
– If the customer equipment supports natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U slot must be
reserved above and below the slot respectively for dissipation.
l Requirement for temperature:
Table 4-51 Temperature requirements for user equipment
Highest Environmental Lowest Operating Highest Operating

Temperature Temperature of the User Temperature of the User
Equipment Equipment
Equal to or lower than 40° Equal to or lower than -10° Equal to or higher than 55°
C C C
Higher than 40°C Equal to or lower than -10° Equal to or higher than 60°
C C
Figure 4-57 Requirements for the dimensions and heat dissipation of the internal equipment
(1) Equipment using natural (2) Equipment dissipating heat out (3) Equipment dissipating heat out
ventilation from its left and right from its front and rear

DBS3900
Hardware Description 5 DBS3900 Power System
5 DBS3900 Power System
About This Chapter
The DBS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supplies. When
AC power supply or +24 V DC power supply is used, the power supply must be converted to
-48 V DC power for the base station.
Table 5-1, Table 5-2, and Table 5-3 list the input voltage ranges supported by the DBS3900.
Table 5-1 Applicable AC input voltage ranges
Power Input Type Rated Voltage Working Voltage
220 V AC single-phase 200 V AC to 240 V AC 176 V AC to 290 V AC
220/380 V AC three-phase 200/346 V AC to 240/415 V 176/304 V AC to 290/500 V

AC AC
110 V AC dual-live-wire 100/200 V AC to 120/240 V 90/180 V AC to 135/270 V

AC AC
Table 5-2 -48 V DC input voltage range
Power Supply Rated Voltage
-48 V DC -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Table 5-3 +24 V DC input voltage range
Power Supply Rated Voltage
+24 V DC +21.6 V DC to +29 V DC

DBS3900
5.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables

This section describes the requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in
various DBS3900 cabinets.
5.2 Power Distribution Schemes

This section describes the power distribution schemes for various DBS3900 cabinets in the
power supply scenarios such as 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC.

DBS3900
5.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and

Power Cables
This section describes the requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in
various DBS3900 cabinets.
5.1.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/

APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet
This section describes the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables for the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet. The recommended configurations are
all based on a fully configured base station, which means the full configurations of modules in
the cabinet and the maximum configurations of cabinet combinations. The power requirements
for the customer equipment in the cabinet are also included.
NOTE
In the following tables, P is short for pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by
a pole.
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supply in the APM30 or APM30H
(Ver.A), the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables
are listed in Table 5-4.
Table 5-4 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in the APM30 or
APM30H (Ver.A)
Power Supply Requirement for Cross-Sectional Length of the

the Circuit Area of the Power Input Power Cable
Breakers on Cable
Customer
Equipment
220 V AC single- 1 x 32 A/1 P 4mm2 (0.006 in.2) ≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)

phase
220 V AC three- 1 x 20 A/3 P 2.5 mm2 (0.004 in.2) ≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)

phase
110 V AC dual-live- 1 x 32 A/2 P 4mm2 (0.006 in.2) ≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)

wire
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supply in the TMC or TMC11H
(Ver.A), the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables
are listed in Table 5-5.

DBS3900
Table 5-5 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in the TMC or
TMC11H (Ver.A)

Breakers on Cable
Customer
Equipment
-48 V DC Minimum: 1 x 63 A/ 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

1 P, maximum: 1 x 80
A/1 P
5.1.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H

(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet
This section lists the recommended configurations of circuit breakers and power cables for the
APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). APM30H is short for advanced power module with a
heat exchanger. The recommended configurations are all based on a fully configured base
station, which means the full configurations of modules in the cabinet and the maximum
configurations of cabinet combinations. The power capacities for the customer equipment in the
cabinet are also included.
NOTE
a pole.
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supplied and the BBU3900 is installed
in the APM30H (Ver.B), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables are listed in Table 5-6.
Table 5-6 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in the
APM30H (Ver.B)

Breakers on Cable
Customer
Equipment
220 V AC single- 1x50 A/1 P 6 mm2 (0.009 in.2) ≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)

phase
110 V AC dual-live- 1x50 A/2 P

wire
220 V AC three- 1x25 A/3 P 2.5 mm2 (0.004 in.2) ≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
phase

DBS3900
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supplied and the BBU is installed in
the APM30H (Ver.C), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
APM30H (Ver.C)

Breakers on Cable
Customer
Equipment
220 V AC single- 1x63 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) ≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)

phase
110 V AC dual-live- 1x63 A/2 P 16mm2

wire
220 V AC three- 1x25 A/3 P 4 mm2 (0.006 in.2) ≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)

phase
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supplied and the BBU is installed in
the TMC11H (Ver.B), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables are listed in Table 5-8. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heat
exchanger.
TMC11H (Ver.B)

Breakers on Cable
Customer
Equipment
-48 V DC Minimum: 1x63 A/1 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

P, maximum: 1x80
A/1 P
the TMC11H (Ver.C), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and

DBS3900
TMC11H (Ver.C)
Maximum Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of the Length of

Configuration (1) Specification of Power Cable the Input
(2)(3) the Circuit Power
Breakers on Cable
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
l 4 to 6 RRUs 1x80 A 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of ≤ 10 m

(power < 300 W) DC input power cables (32.81 ft)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W) (6)
l 1 to 3 RRUs 1x63 A 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

(power < 300 W) DC input power cables
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W) (6)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 1x160 A 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smoke

W ≤ power < zero halogen (LSZH), a group
560 W) of DC input power cables
l 1 BBU
2x80 A 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups
l Transmission
of DC input power cables(7)
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W) (6)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 1x80 A 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

W ≤ power < DC input power cables
560 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W) (6)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 1x100 A 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smoke

l 1 BBU

DBS3900

Breakers on Cable
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
l Transmission 2x63 A 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups
equipment of DC input power cables(7)
(power ≤ 350
W) (6)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 1x63 A 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

400 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W) (6)
l 3 RRUs (power < 1x100 A 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smoke

300 W) zero halogen (LSZH), a group
l 3 RRUs (300 W of DC input power cables (7)
≤ power < 400
W) 2x63 A 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups
of DC input power cables
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W) (6)
l 3 RRUs (power < 1x160 A 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smoke

l 3 RRUs (400 W of DC input power cables
≤ power < 560
2x63 A 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W) (6)
l 3 RRUs (300 W 1x160 A 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smoke

≤ power < 400 zero halogen (LSZH), a group
W) of DC input power cables

DBS3900

Breakers on Cable
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
l 3 RRUs (400 W 2x63 A 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups
≤ power < 560 of DC input power cables(7)
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W) (6)

DBS3900
NOTE
(1) The maximum power of different types of RRUs is as follows:

l The maximum power of the following types of RRUs does not exceed 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C,
RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3824, RRU3826, and RRU3838.
l The maximum power of the following types of RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W: RRU3008,
RRU3805, RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3222, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203,
RRU3232, RRU3936, RRU3832, and RRU3926.
RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3829, RRU3240, RRU3229, and
RRU3942.
(2) When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit
breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
(3) When the customer power supply is sufficient, the recommended specification of circuit breakers is
based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs to meet all configurations. When the originally
configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements of full configuration of high-power RRUs, the
circuit breakers need to be replaced during capacity expansion.
(4) When more than six RRUs are configured, a minimum of two DCDU-11Bs need to be configured.
DCDU-11B is short for direct current distribution unit type B.
(5) The circuit breakers used for a configuration meet the requirements for all relatively smaller
configurations.
(6) The circuit breakers that meet a load meet the requirements for all scenarios with a relatively smaller
load. The circuit breakers are arranged in descending order of load capacity as follows: 160 A > 2x80 A >
2x63 A > 100 A > 80 A > 63 A
(7) When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers
corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit
breakers that support 350 W.
(8) When two groups of power inputs are used, they must meet the following requirements:
l Both groups of power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l Both groups of power inputs use the circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l Both groups of power inputs use power cables of the same core diameter and length.
l To power on the base station, first turn on the circuit breakers for both groups of power inputs and
then turn on the circuit breakers for all TRXs in the base station. To power off the base station, first
turn off the circuit breakers for all TRXs and then turn off the circuit breakers for both groups of
power inputs.
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supplied, a heater must be installed in
a TMC cabinet, and one more AC power input must be added. The recommended configurations
of circuit breakers and power cables in this circumstance are listed in Table 5-10.
Table 5-10 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables
for the heater
Power Supply Requirement for Description of Length of the

the Circuit Input Power Cable Input Power Cable
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
220 V AC single- 1 x 10 A/1 P 1.5 mm2 (0.002 in.2) ≤ 15 m (39.37 ft.)

phase power

DBS3900
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with +24 V DC power supplied and is configured with
a APM30H (Ver.B), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power
cables are listed in Table 5-11.
Table 5-11 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in
the APM30H (Ver.B)

Breakers on Cable
Customer
Equipment
+24 V DC Minimum: 1x160 A, 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2) ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

maximum: 2x100 A
5.1.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)

This section lists the recommended configurations of circuit breakers and power cables for the
APM30H (Ver.D). APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat exchanger. The
recommended configurations are all based on a fully configured base station, which means the
full configurations of modules in the cabinet and the maximum configurations of combined
cabinets. The power requirements of customer equipment in the cabinet are also included.
NOTE
a pole.
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supplied and the BBU is installed in
the APM30H (Ver.D), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
the APM30H (Ver.D)

Breaker on Cable
Customer
Equipment
220 V AC three- 1x40 A/3 P 6 mm2 (0.009 in.2) ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

phase
220 V AC single- 1x100 A/1 P 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)

phase

wire

DBS3900
the TMC11H (Ver.D), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
the TMC11H (Ver.D)

Breakers on the Cable
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
l 4 to 6 RRUs 1x80 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of ≤ 10 m

(power < 300 W) DC input power cables (32.81 ft)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W)(6)
l 1 to 3 RRUs 1x63 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

(power < 300 W) DC input power cables
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W)(6)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 1x160 A/1 P 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2), low smoke

l 1 BBU
2x80 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups
l Transmission
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W)(6)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 1x80 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

560 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W)(6)

DBS3900

Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 1x80 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a groups of

W ≤ power < DC input power cables(7)
400 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W)(6)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 1x63 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

400 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W)(6)
l 3 RRUs (power < 1x100 A/1 P 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2), low smoke
≤ power < 400
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W)(6)
l 3 RRUs (power < 1x160 A/1 P 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2), low smoke
≤ power < 560
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W)(6)

DBS3900

Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
l 3 RRUs (300 W 1x160 A/1 P 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2), low smoke

≤ power < 400 zero halogen (LSZH), a group
W) of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (400 W
≤ power < 560
W) of DC input power cables(7)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power ≤ 350
W)(6)
l 7 to 9 RRUs 1x80 A/1 P+1x63 A/ 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups

(power 1P of DC input power cables
consumption ≤
300 W)
l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 7 to 9 RRUs (300 1x100 A/1 P+1x63 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2), a group of

W ≤ power < A/1 P DC input power cables
400 W)
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of
l 1 or 2 BBUs DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P+1x63 A/ 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), three

1P groups of DC input power
cables
l 7 to 9 RRUs 1x160 A/1 P+1x80 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2), low smoke

(power A/1 P zero halogen (LSZH), a group
consumption ≤ of DC input power cables
560 W)
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of
l 1 or 2 BBUs DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P+1x80 A/ 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), three

1 P (default) groups of DC input power
cables
l 12 RRUs (power 2x80 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups

consumption ≤ of DC input power cables
300 W)
l 1 or 2 BBUs

DBS3900

Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
l 12 RRUs (300 W 1x100 A/1 P+1x80 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2), a group of

≤ power A/1 P DC input power cables
consumption ≤
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of
400 W)
DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs
2x63 A/1 P+1x80 A/ 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), three
1P groups of DC input power
cables
l 12 RRUs (power 2x160 A/1 P 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2), low smoke

consumption ≤ zero halogen (LSZH), two
560 W) group of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs
4x80 A/1 P (default) 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups

DBS3900
NOTE
(1) The maximum power of different types of RRUs is as follows:

l The maximum power of the following types of RRUs does not exceed 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C,
RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3824, RRU3826, and RRU3838.
RRU3232, RRU3936, RRU3832, and RRU3926.
RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3829, RRU3240, RRU3229, and
RRU3942.
(3) When the customer power supply is sufficient, the recommended specification of circuit breakers is
based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs to meet all configurations. When the originally
configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements of full configuration of high-power RRUs, the
circuit breakers need to be replaced during capacity expansion.
(4) When more than six RRUs are configured, a minimum of two DCDU-11Bs need to be configured.
DCDU-12B is short for direct current distribution unit type B.
(5) The circuit breakers used for a configuration meet the requirements for all relatively smaller
configurations.
(6) The circuit breakers that meet a load meet the requirements for all scenarios with a relatively smaller
load. The circuit breakers are arranged in descending order as follows: 160 A > 2x80 A > 2x63 A > 100
A > 80 A > 63 A
(7) When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers
corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit
breakers that support 350 W.
(8) When two groups of power inputs are used, they must meet the following requirements:
l Both groups of power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l Both groups of power inputs use the circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l Both groups of power inputs use power cables of the same core diameter and length.
l To power on the base station, first turn on the circuit breakers for both groups of power inputs and
then turn on the circuit breakers for all TRX modules in the base station. To power off the base station,
first turn off the circuit breakers for all TRX modules and then turn off the circuit breakers for both
groups of power inputs.
5.1.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB

(Ver.C)
This section describes the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and
power cable for the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) cabinet. The recommended configurations are all
based on a fully configured base station, which means the full configurations of modules in the
cabinet and the maximum configurations of combined cabinets. The power requirements of the
customer equipment in the cabinet are also included.
When the BBU installed in an OMB or OMB (Ver.C) is supplied with power from the customer
equipment, the circuit breaker on the customer equipment should be of 15 A to 25 A.
When the DBS3900 is supplied with the AC power and the BBU is installed in the OMB or
OMB (Ver.C), the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable are
separately listed in Table 5-14 and Table 5-15.

DBS3900
Table 5-14 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable for the OMB
cabinet

Breaker on Cable
Customer
Equipment
220 V AC single- 1x10 A 4 mm2 (0.006 in.2) ≤40m

phase
110 V AC dual-live-
wire
Table 5-15 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable for the OMB
(Ver.C) cabinet
Power Supply Product Requirement Cross- Length of the

Configuration for the Circuit Sectional Input Power
Breaker on Area of the Cable
Customer Power Cable
Equipment
220 V AC 1PSU 20 A/1 P 4 mm2 (0.006 in. ≤15m

single-phase 2)
2PSU 32 A/1 P
110 V AC dual- 1PSU 20 A/2 P

live-wire
2PSU 32 A/2 P
When the DBS3900 is supplied with the DC power and the BBU is installed in the OMB or
OMB (Ver.C), the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable are
separately listed in Table 5-16 and Table 5-17.

DBS3900
Table 5-16 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable
(with DC power supplied and OMB used)

Breaker on Cable
Customer
Equipment
-48 V DC Minimum: 1x63 A, 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) ≤15m

maximum: 1x80 A
(all using the level-1
magnetic blast
breaker)
Table 5-17 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable
(with DC power supplied and OMB (Ver.C) used)
Product Requirement for Cross-Sectional Length of the

Configuration the Circuit Area of the Power Input Power Cable
Breaker on Cable
Customer
Equipment
l 1 to 3 RRUs 50 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) ≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)

(power
consumption of
each RRU ≤ 300
W)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption ≤
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption ≤
200 W)

DBS3900

Breaker on Cable
Customer
Equipment
l 4 to 6 RRUs 80 A/1 P
(power
consumption of
each RRU ≤ 300
W)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption ≤
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption ≤
200 W)
l 1 to 3 RRUs 63 A/1 P
(power
consumption of
each RRU ≤ 400
W)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption ≤
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption ≤
200 W)
l 4 to 6 RRUs 100 A/1 P 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)

(power
consumption of 2x63 A/2 P 2x16 mm2 (0.025 in.
2)
each RRU ≤ 400
W)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption ≤
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption ≤
200 W)

DBS3900

Breaker on Cable
Customer
Equipment
l 1 to 3 RRUs 80 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)

(power
consumption of
each RRU ≤ 560
W)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption ≤
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption ≤
200 W)
l 4 to 6 RRUs 125 A/1 P 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)

(power
consumption of 2x63 A/2 P 2x16 mm2 (0.025 in.
2)
each RRU ≤ 560
W)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption ≤
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption ≤
200 W)
l 3 RRUs (power 80 A/1 P 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)

consumption of
each RRU ≤ 300
W)
l 3 RRUs (300 W
≤ power
consumption of
each RRU ≤ 400
W)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption ≤
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power

DBS3900

Breaker on Cable
Customer
Equipment
consumption ≤ 2x63 A/2 P 2x16 mm2 (0.025 in.

200 W) 2)

consumption of
each RRU ≤ 300 2x63 A/2 P 2x16 mm2 (0.025 in.
2)
W)
l 3 RRUs (400 W
≤ power
consumption of
each RRU ≤ 560
W)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption ≤
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption ≤
200 W)

consumption of
each RRU ≤ 400
W)
l 3 RRUs (400 W
≤ power
consumption of
each RRU ≤ 560
W)

DBS3900

Breaker on Cable
Customer
Equipment
l 1 BBU (power 2x63 A/2 P 2x16 mm2 (0.025 in.
consumption ≤ 2)
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption ≤
200 W)
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows:

l The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is equal to or less than 300 W: RRU3804,
RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, and RRU3004.
l The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W: RRU3908,
RRU3928, and RRU3222.
l The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W: RRU3829,
RRU3229, RRU3241, and RRU3942.
5.1.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03, IFS06,

19-inch Rack or Wall
This section describes the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and
power cable in the scenario where the BBU in a DBS3900 is installed in an IMB03/IFS06/19-
inch rack or on a wall. The recommended configurations are all based on a fully configured base
station, which means the full configurations of modules in the cabinet and the maximum
configurations of combined cabinets. The power requirements of the customer equipment in the
cabinet are also included.
NOTE
a pole.

DBS3900
When the DBS3900 is supplied with the AC or DC power and the BBU is installed in the IMB03,
the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable are separately listed in
Table 5-18 and Table 5-19. When the DBS3900 is supplied with the DC power and the BBU
is installed in the 19-inch rack or on a wall indoors, the configurations of the upper-level circuit
breaker and power cable are separately listed in Table 5-19.
Table 5-18 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable when the IMB03
is used in the AC power supply scenario

Breaker on Cable
Customer
Equipment
220 V AC single- 1x10 A 4 mm2 (0.006 in.2) ≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)

phase
110 V AC dual-live-
wire
is used in the DC power supply scenario

Breaker on Cable
Customer
Equipment
-48 V DC Minimum: 1x63 A/1 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

P, maximum: 1x80
A/1 P
When the DBS3900 is supplied with the AC or DC power and the BBU is installed in the IMB03
+IFS06, the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable are separately
listed in Table 5-20 and Table 5-21.

DBS3900
+IFS06 is used in the AC power supply scenario

Breaker on Cable
Customer
Equipment
220 V AC three- 1x16 A/3 P 2.5 mm2 (0.004 in.2) ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
phase
220 V AC single- 1x32 A/1 P 4 mm2 (0.006 in.2)

phase

wire
+IFS06 is used in the DC power supply scenario

Breaker on Cable
Customer
Equipment
-48 V DC 1x80 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
+24 V DC 2x100 A/1 P 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)

1x160 A/1 P
5.1.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A

Cabinet
This section describes the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables for the TP48600A cabinet. The recommended configurations are all based on a
fully configured base station, which has the peak output power. The power requirements for the
customer equipment in the cabinet are also included.
Table 5-22 lists the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power
cables for the TP48600A cabinet.

DBS3900
Table 5-22 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables
Power Supply Product Requirement Cross- Length of the

Configuration for the Circuit Sectional Input Power
Breakers on Area of the Cable
Customer Power Cable
Equipment
220 V AC three- 7 power supply 63 A/3 P(1) 10 mm2 (0.016 ≤ 15 m (49.21

phase units (PSUs)+1 (recommended) in.2) ft)
service outlet
unit (SOU)
4 to 6 PSUs+1 40 A/3 P
SOU
4 to 7 PSUs+1 63 A/3 P
HAU+1 SOU
220 V AC 7 PSUs+1 SOU 125 A/1 P 35 mm2 (0.054 ≤ 15 m (49.21

single-phase (recommended) in.2) ft)
6 PSUs+1 SOU 125 A/1 P
6 PSUs+1 HAU 125 A/1 P

+1 SOU

+1 SOU

+1 SOU
110 V AC dual- 7 PSUs+1 SOU 125 A/2 P 35 mm2 (0.054 ≤ 15 m (49.21

live-wire (recommended) in.2) ft)
NOTE
(1) P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
5.2 Power Distribution Schemes

This section describes the power distribution schemes for various DBS3900 cabinets in the
power supply scenarios such as 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC.

DBS3900
5.2.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/

APM30H(Ver.A) Cabinet
This section describes the power distribution schemes for the DBS3900 using the APM30/
APM30H (Ver.A) in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power supply scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario

When the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) uses 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the power
distribution unit (PDU) in the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) converts AC power into DC power.
The PDU converts one AC power input into two AC outputs and ten DC outputs.
Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2show the power distribution schemes for the APM30 in the 220 V
AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-23 lists the specifications of the circuit
breakers and fuses in the base station in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios.
NOTE
When the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used, the three AC power inputs do not need to be
connected in series using a short-circuiting strip. The power distribution principles for this scenario are the
same as those for the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario.
Figure 5-1 Power distribution scheme for the APM30 in the 220 V AC single-phase power
supply scenario

DBS3900
Figure 5-2 Power distribution scheme for the APM30 in the 110 V AC dual-live-wire power
supply scenario
Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.A) in
the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-23 lists the specifications of the
circuit breakers and fuses in the base station in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply
scenarios.
Figure 5-3 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.A) in the 220 V AC single-phase
power supply scenario

DBS3900
Figure 5-4 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.A) in the 110 V AC dual-live-wire
Table 5-23 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30/APM30H (Ver.B) in
the AC power supply scenario
Power Supply Specifications of Specifications of Specifications of

Upper-Level AC Output Circuit DC Output Circuit
Circuit Breakers Breakers Breakers and
for the PDU Fuses
220 V AC single- 3 x 16 A (MCB1) l Heater: 1 x 10 A l RRU: 6 × 20 A

phase/three-phase l Heating film: 1 x l BBU: 1 × 12 A
10 A l FAN: 1 × 12 A
110 V AC dual-live- 2 x 30 A (MCB)
wire l TM2: 2 × 4 A
NOTE
(1) Miniature circuit breaker (MCB)

(2) TM: Transmission equipment
When the DBS3900 uses AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the transmission
cabinet. The transmission cabinet provides power supply for the transmission device, fan box,
and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distribution box, as shown in Figure
5-5.

DBS3900
Figure 5-5 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses the
AC power supply
Table 5-24 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the
DBS3900 uses the AC power supply
Table 5-24 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900
uses the AC power supply
Application Scenario Power Supply Specifications of DC

Output Circuit Breakers
APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) + 220 V AC l TM: 7 x 12 A (MCB) + 1

Transmission cabinet x 6 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1 x 6 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Scheme in the -48V DC Power Supply Scenario

When the DBS3900 is supplied with -48 V DC power, the external power is supplied to the
TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A), and forwarded to the BBU, RRU, fan box, and other components in
the cabinet through the DC power distribution box.
Figure 5-6 shows the power distribution schemes for the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A). Table 5-25
lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A).

DBS3900
Figure 5-6 Power distribution scheme for the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A) in the -48 V DC power
supply scenario
Table 5-25 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A) in the -48 V DC
Cabinet Type Specifications of DC Output Circuit

Breakers
TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A) l RRU0 to RRU5: 6 × 20 A (MCB)

l BBU: 1 x 12 A (MCB)
l TM: 1 x 12 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1 x 12 A (MCB)
5.2.2 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B)

or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet
This section describes the power distribution schemes for the DBS3900 using the APM30H
(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power
supply scenarios. APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat exchanger.
Power Distribution Principles in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario

When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used, the AC power is converted into DC power by the
embedded power system (EPS) or embedded power subrack unit (EPU) and distributed to
After going through the EPS or EPU, one AC power input is divided into two AC power outputs:
l One provides AC power for the service outlet unit (SOU).

DBS3900
l One is connected to the junction box on the left of the cabinet, and divided into four AC
power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery
cabinet, transmission cabinet, baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU), and other
equipment.
NOTE
When the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used, the three AC power inputs do not need to be
connected in series using a short-circuiting bar. The power distribution principles for this scenario are the
same as those for the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario.
Figure 5-7 and Figure 5-8 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.B) in
the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-26 lists the specifications of
circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply
scenarios.
Figure 5-7 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) when the DBS3900 uses the
220 V AC single-phase power supply

DBS3900
Figure 5-8 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) when the DBS3900 uses the
110 V AC dual-live power supply
Table 5-26 Specifications of circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) when the

Circuit Breakers of Breakers Breakers and
the EPS Fuses
220 V AC single- 3x16 A (MCB(1)) l Heater and SOU: l Battery (BAT)(2):

phase/three-phase 1x16 A (MCB) 1x100 A (MCB)
110 V AC dual-live- 1x40 A (MCB) l Heater: 1x16 A l RRU: 6x20 A
wire (MCB) (MCB)
l Transmission
l SOU: 1x16 A
cabinet (TMC):
(MCB)
1x25 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x15 A
(FUSE(3))
l BBU: 2x15 A
(FUSE)
l Thermoelectric
cooling unit
(TEC)(4): 1x15 A
(FUSE)
l Transmission
equipment (TM)
(5): 4x15 A
(FUSE)

DBS3900
NOTE
(1) MCB: miniature circuit breaker

(2) BAT: storage battery
(3) FUSE: fuse
(4) TM: transmission equipment
Figure 5-9 and Figure 5-10 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.C) in
circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply
scenarios.
Figure 5-9 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) when the DBS3900 uses the
220 V AC single-phase power supply

DBS3900
Figure 5-10 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) when the DBS3900 uses the
110 V AC dual-live power supply
Table 5-27 Specifications of circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) when the

the EPS Fuses
220 V AC single- 3x20 A (MCB) l Heater and SOU: l BAT: 1x160 A

phase/three-phase 1x15 A (MCB) (MCB)
l RRU: 6x25 A
110 V AC dual-live- 1x63 A (MCB) l Heater: 1x15 A
(MCB)
wire (MCB)
l TMC: 1x30 A
l SOU: 1x15 A
(MCB)
(MCB)
l FAN: 1x15 A
(FUSE)
l BBU: 2x25 A
(FUSE)
l TEC: 1x15 A
(FUSE)
l TM: 4x15 A
(FUSE)
When the APM30H (Ver.B) uses the AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the
transmission cabinet. The transmission cabinet provides power supply for the transmission
equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distribution
box, as shown in Figure 5-11.

DBS3900
Figure 5-11 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses
the AC power supply
Table 5-28 lists the specifications of circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the
Table 5-28 Specifications of circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900

Breakers
Transmission cabinet l TM: 7x12 A (MCB)+1x6 A (MCB)

l FAN: 1x6 A (MCB)
When the APM30H (Ver.C) uses the AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the
transmission cabinet. The transmission cabinet provides power supply for the transmission
equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distribution
box, as shown in Figure 5-12.

DBS3900
the AC power supply
Table 5-29 lists the specifications of circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the
Table 5-29 Specifications of circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900

Breakers
Transmission cabinet l TM: 2x6 A (MCB)+2x12 A (MCB)+2x25

A (MCB)
l TM/BBU: 2x25 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Principles in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

When the DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, its BBU can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B), and
the DCDU-03B in the TMC11H (Ver.B) can provide DC power to the BBU, RRUs, and fan
assembly. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heat exchanger
Figure 5-13 shows the power distribution schemes for the TMC11H (Ver.B). Table 5-30 lists
the specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B).

DBS3900
Figure 5-13 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.B) in the -48 V DC power supply
scenario
Table 5-30 Specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B) in the -48 V DC power
supply scenario

Breakers
TMC11H (Ver.B) l RRU0 to RRU5: 6x20 A (MCB)

l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB)
l TM: 1x12 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)
When the DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, its BBU can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C), and
the DCDU-11B in the TMC11H (Ver.C) can provide DC power to the BBU, RRUs, and fan
assembly.
Figure 5-14 shows the power distribution schemes for the TMC11H (Ver.C). Table 5-31 lists
the specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C).

DBS3900
Figure 5-14 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.C) in the -48 V DC power supply
scenario
Table 5-31 Specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C) in the -48 V DC power
supply scenario

Breakers
TMC11H (Ver.C) l RRU0 to RRU5: 6x25 A (MCB)

l BBU: 2x25 A (MCB)
l TM: 1x25 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Principles in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario

When the DBS3900 is supplied with +24 V DC power, the +24 V DC power is converted to -48
V DC power by the DC/DC power system in the APM30H (Ver.B) and forwarded to the
DCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B provides power supply for the BBU, RRUs, fan assembly,
transmission equipment, and other components.
Figure 5-15 shows the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.B). Table 5-32 lists
the specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B).

DBS3900
Figure 5-15 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply
scenario
Table 5-32 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power
supply scenario

Breakers
APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V) l RRU0 to RRU5: 6x20 A (MCB)

l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB)
l TM: 1x12 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)
5.2.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)

This section describes the power distribution principles in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, or -48 V
DC power supply scenario where the BBU in a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D).

When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used, the AC power is converted into DC power by the
embedded power subrack unit (EPU, which is EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05) and distributed to
The EPU converts one AC power input into two AC power outputs:
l One output provides AC power for the service outlet unit (SOU).
l One is connected to the junction box on the left of the cabinet, and divided into four AC
power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.

DBS3900
The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery
cabinet, transmission cabinet, baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU), and other
equipment.
NOTE
The 220 V AC three-phase power supply has the same power distribution scheme as the 220 V AC single-
phase power supply, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting
bars when the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used.
Figure 5-16 and Figure 5-17 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.D) in
circuit breakers and fuses in the or APM30H (Ver.D) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power
supply scenarios.
Figure 5-16 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) that uses 220 V AC single-
phase power supply

DBS3900
Figure 5-17 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) that uses 110 V AC dual-live
power supply
Table 5-33 Specifications of circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.D) that uses AC
power supply

the EPU Fuses
220 V AC single- 2x40 A+1x25 A Heater and SOU: l BAT: 1x125 A/

phase/three-phase 1x16 A (MCB) 2P (MCB)
l RFC: 1x125 A
110 V AC dual-live- 1x100 A Heater: 1x16 A
(MCB)
wire (MCB)
l RRU 0 to RRU 5:
SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
6x30 A (FUSE)
l BBU: 2x30 A
(FUSE)
l FAN: 1x30 A
(FUSE)
l TM: 4x30 A
(FUSE)
l TMC: 1x30 A
(FUSE)
l IBBS: 1x30 A
(FUSE)

DBS3900
NOTE
When a site is configured with seven to twelve RRUs, a DCDU-12B must be installed below the BBU. In
this case, the RFC1 terminal on the EPU feeds external DC power into the DCDU-12B, which provides
power inputs for the RRUs, as shown in Figure 5-19.
When the APM30H (Ver.D) uses the AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the
transmission cabinet. The DC power distribution box in the transmission cabinet provides power
supply for the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet, as
the AC power supply
Table 5-34 lists the specifications of fuses in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses
the AC power supply
Table 5-34 Specifications of fuses in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses the AC
power supply
Cabinet Type Specifications of DC Output Fuses
TMC11H (Ver.D) serving as a transmission l TM: 7x30 A (FUSE)

cabinet l TM/BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE)
l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)

When the DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, its BBU can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D), and
the DCDU-12B in the TMC11H (Ver.D) provides DC power to the BBU, RRUs, and fan
assembly.

DBS3900
Figure 5-19 shows the power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.D). Table 5-35 lists
the specifications of fuses in the TMC11H (Ver.D).
Figure 5-19 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.D) in the -48 V DC power supply
scenario
Table 5-35 Specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.D) in the -48 V DC power
supply scenario
Cabinet Type Specifications of DC Output Fuses
TMC11H (Ver.D) l RRU: 6x30 A (FUSE)

serving as a power l TM/BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE)
cabinet
l TM: 1x30 A (FUSE)
5.2.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB

(Ver.C)
This section describes the power distribution principles in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, or -48 V
DC power supply scenario where the BBU in a DBS3900 is installed in an OMB or OMB
(Ver.C).

When the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the AC power is converted into DC power
by the AC/DC power equipment and distributed to other components in the cabinet.

DBS3900
Figure 5-20 shows the power distribution principles for the OMB when the 220 V AC single-
phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power is supplied. Table 5-36 lists the specifications of the
circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Figure 5-20 Power distribution principles for the OMB in the 220 V AC or 110 V AC power
supply scenario
Table 5-36 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station

and Fuses
OMB 220 V AC single-phase or l BBU and HEUA: 1x10 A

110 V AC dual-live-wire l RRU: 1x12 A
l TM: 1x4 A
Figure 5-21 shows the power distribution principles for the OMB (Ver.C) when the 220 V AC
single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power is supplied. Table 5-37 lists the specifications
of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Figure 5-21

DBS3900

and Fuses
OMB (Ver.C) 220 V AC single-phase or l BBU: 1x30 A (FUSE(1))

110 V AC dual-live-wire
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6×30 A
(FUSE)
NOTE
(1) FUSE: fuse

When the -48 V DC power is supplied, the DCDU feeds power to the BBU, RRUs, and other
Figure 5-22 shows the power distribution principles for the OMB in the -48 V DC power supply
scenario. Table 5-38 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Figure 5-22 Power Distribution Principles for the OMB in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

DBS3900

and Fuses
OMB -48 V DC l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A

(MCB)
l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB)
l Transmission equipment:
1x12 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)
Figure 5-23 shows the power distribution principles for the OMB (Ver.C) in the -48 V DC power
supply scenario. Table 5-39 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base
station.
Figure 5-23

DBS3900

and Fuses
OMB (Ver.C) -48 V DC l BBU: 1x30 A (FUSE)

l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x30 A
(FUSE)
5.2.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03, IFS06,

19-inch Rack or Wall
This section describes the power distribution principles in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC,
or +24 V DC power supply scenario when the BBU in a DBS3900 is installed in an IMB03/
IFS06/19-inch rack or on a wall.

When the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the AC power is converted into DC power
by the AC/DC power equipment and distributed to other components in the cabinet.
Figure 5-24 shows the power distribution principles for the IMB03 in the 220 V AC single-
phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supply scenario. Table 5-40 lists the specifications of
the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Figure 5-24 Power distribution principles for the IMB03 in the 220 V AC or 110 V AC power
supply scenario

DBS3900

and Fuses
IMB03 220 V AC single-phase or l BBU and HEUA: 1x10 A

110 V AC dual-live-wire l RRU: 1x12 A
l TM: 1x4 A

When the -48 V DC power is supplied, the DCDU-03B feeds power to the BBU, RRUs, and
other components in the cabinet.
Figure 5-25 shows the power distribution principles in the -48 V DC power supply scenario
when the BBU is installed in an IMB03, IMB03+IFS06, or 19-inch rack, or on a wall. Table
5-41 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Figure 5-25 Power Distribution Principles in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

DBS3900

and Fuses
IMB03, IMB03+IFS06, wall, -48 V DC l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A

and 19-inch rack (MCB)
l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB)
1x12 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Principles in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario

When the +24 V DC power is supplied and the BBU is installed in the IMB03+IFS06, the +24
V DC power is converted into -48 V DC power by the DC/DC power equipment in the IMB03
and forwarded to the DCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B feeds power to the BBU, RRUs, and other
Figure 5-26 shows the power distribution principles for the IMB03. Table 5-42 lists the
specifications of the circuit breakers in the IMB03.
Figure 5-26 Power distribution principles for the IMB03 in the +24 V DC power supply scenario

DBS3900
Table 5-42 Specifications of circuit breakers in the IMB03 in the +24 V DC power supply
scenario

IMB03+IFS06 +24 V DC l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A

(MCB)
l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB)
1x12 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x12A (MCB)
5.2.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A

Cabinet
This section describes the power distribution schemes for the DBS3900 using the TP48600A
cabinet in the 110 V AC and 220 V AC power supply scenarios.
When the TP48600A cabinet uses the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the AC power
supply is distributed by the PDU05A-03 and converted into DC power by the ETP. The
DCDU-11C and DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B distribute the DC power to the BBU, RRU,
transmission equipment, and other components. PDU is short for power distribution unit, ETP
is short for embedded telecommunication power, DCDU is short for direct current distribution
unit, BBU is short for baseband unit, and RRU is short for remote radio unit.
After going through the PDU05A-03, an AC power input is divided into five AC power outputs.
l One AC power output is connected to the junction box on the right of the cabinet door, and
divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the HAU.
l Three AC power outputs are connected to the PSUs and converted by the PSUs into DC
power outputs, which are then provided for the DCDU-11C, DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B, and
storage batteries.
l One AC power output is provided for the SOU.
Figure 5-27 shows the power distribution scheme when 220 V AC three-phase power is supplied
and the DCDU-11B is used. Figure 5-28 shows the power distribution scheme when 220 V AC
three-phase power is supplied and the DCDU-03B is used. Table 5-43 lists the specifications
of circuit breakers.
The power distribution scheme for the cabinet supplied with 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V
AC dual-live-wire input power is the same as the power distribution scheme for the cabinet
supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power. The difference among the power distribution
schemes for the three types of power inputs lies in the configuration of the short-circuiting bars,
as shown in Figure 5-29.

DBS3900
Figure 5-27 Power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power
(DCDU-11B)

DBS3900
Figure 5-28 Power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power
(DCDU-03B)
Table 5-43 Circuit breaker specification
Power Distribution Specifications of AC Specifications of DC

Equipment Output Circuit Breakers Output Circuit Breakers
PDU05A-03 l PSU1/5: 1x40 A -

l PSU2/6: 1x40 A
l PSU3/4/7: 1x63 A
l HEATER: 1x25 A
l SOU: 1x10 A

DBS3900
Power Distribution Specifications of AC Specifications of DC

Equipment Output Circuit Breakers Output Circuit Breakers
ETP - l DCDU-11C: LOAD0

(1x100 A)
l DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B:
LOAD3 (1x200 A) and
LOAD5 (1x200 A)
l TMC11H (Ver.C):
LOAD1 and LOAD2
(1x100 A)
l Storage batteries:
LOAD6 (1x400 A)
l SPARE: LOAD4 (1x200
A)
DCDU-11C - l Cabinet control unit

(CCU): LOAD0 (1x6 A)
l Central monitoring unit
type F (CMUF): LOAD1
(1x6 A)
l Transmission equipment
(TM)(1): LOAD2 (1x12
A)
l Environment monitoring
unit type A (EMUA)/TM:
LOAD3 (1x12 A)
l BBU: LOAD4 to LOAD7
(4x25 A)
l Environment monitoring
unit type F (CMUF):
LOAD8 (1x25 A)
l IBBS: LOAD9 (1x25 A)
DCDU-11B - l RRU: LOAD0 to LOAD5

(6x25 A)
l SPARE: LOAD6 to
LOAD9 (4x25 A)
DCDU-03B - l RRU: LOAD0 to LOAD5

(6x20 A)
l SPARE: LOAD6 to
LOAD8 (3x12 A)
NOTE
(1) TM: transmission equipment

DBS3900
Figure 5-29 Configuration of short-circuiting bars

DBS3900
Hardware Description 6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
About This Chapter
The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in the
cabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU and
UEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components to
achieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900.
6.1 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet
The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect
alarms from sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU
through the RS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.
6.2 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet
The APM30 (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards
collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals
to the MON port on the BBU through the RS485 serial bus.
6.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)
The APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect alarms from
components such as sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on
the BBU through the RS485 serial bus.
6.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C)
The OMB or OMB (Ver.C) cabinet is monitored by various boards or modules. The monitoring
boards or modules collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and report the
alarms to the BBU.
6.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03 or IFS06
The IMB03 or IMB03+IFS06 cabinet is monitored by various boards or modules. The
monitoring boards or modules collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and
report the alarms to the BBU. IMB is short for indoor mini box, IFS is short for indoor floor
installation support, and BBU is short for baseband unit.
6.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet
The TP48600A cabinet is monitored by the CCU, CMUF, and PMU. The boards collect alarms
from sensors and fans, and transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU through the
RS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.

DBS3900
6.7 Customized Alarm Input

When an alarm is generated by the customer equipment, the alarm must be reported to the BBU.

DBS3900
6.1 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30 or

APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet
The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect
alarms from sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU
through the RS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.
NOTE
The BBU in a DBS3900 can be installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet in a single- or dual-
mode scenario.
Monitoring Principles of the DBS3900 in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply

Scenario
Figure 6-1 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30+1
TMC+1 BBC or with additional 1 APM30+1 BBC when the BBU is installed in the APM30.
NOTE
The devices monitored by the APMI and AFMU are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description
about the boards.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the AFMU, see AFMU.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured
only in the APM30.
Figure 6-1 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30
APM30 APM30 APM30
COM_IN / COM1
APMI APMI APMI
COM_OUT / COM2
ALM0/ALM1 PMU AFMU PMU AFMU PMU AFMU
MON0 / MON1
TX RX
RS232/RS422
Cable to be BBU BBU
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
source to destination
TMC BBC TMC BBC BBC
Door Status Door Status Door Status
APMI APMI
Sensor Sensor Sensor
AFMU AFMU
Wiring terminal Wiring terminal
for the surge for the surge
protection alarm protection alarm
signal cable on signal cable on
the DCDU the DCDU
Door Status Door Status

Sensor Sensor
Figure 6-2 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC/IBBS or with additional 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1 BBC/
IBBS when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet. The devices monitored by the
HEUA and HPMI are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.

DBS3900
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is
configured only in the APM30H (Ver.A).
Figure 6-2 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H
(Ver.A)
BAT APM30H(Ver.A) APM30H(Ver.A) APM30H(Ver.A)
COM
COM_IN / COM1 HPMI HPMI HPMI
COM_OUT / COM2
PMU HEUA PMU HEUA PMU HEUA
MON0 / MON1
TO PMU DB50
RS232/RS422
Cable to be BBU BBU
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
TMC11H(Ver.A) BBC/IBBS TMC11H(Ver.A) BBC/IBBS BBC/IBBS
Door status Door status Door status

HEUA sensor HEUA sensor
sensor
Monitoring Principles of the DBS3900 in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

Figure 6-3 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with two TMCs or
TMC11Hs(Ver.A) when the BBU is installed in a TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A).
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI.
Figure 6-3 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a TMC or
TMC11H (Ver.A)
TMC/TMC11H TMC/TMC11H
COM_IN / COM1
APMI/HEUA/CMUA APMI/HEUA/CMUA
MON0 / MON1
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery BBU
Monitoring from
6.2 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H

(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet
The APM30 (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards
collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals
to the MON port on the BBU through the RS485 serial bus.
Cabinet Monitoring Principles of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station

the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). When the base station is configured with two
APM30Hs (Ver.B) or APM30Hs (Ver.C), the BBU is installed in the main APM30H (Ver.B)
or APM30H (Ver.C), which is located to the left of another APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H
(Ver.C).

DBS3900
NOTE
The CUMUA is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B), and the CMUE is installed in the APM30H (Ver.C).
The APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) use the same monitoring scheme. The devices monitored by
the CMUA, CMUE, and HPMI are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the
boards.
l For details about the functions of the ports on the CMUA, see CMUA.
l For details about the functions of the ports on the CMUE, see CMUE.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured
only in the APM30H (Ver.B).
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power equipment (DC/DC), see Power
Subrack (DC/DC).
Figure 6-4 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS or with additional
1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS when the BBU is installed in the APM30H
(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).
Figure 6-4 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C) APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C) APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
COM_IN / COM1
HPMI HPMI HPMI
COM_OUT / COM2
COM_485
PMU CMUA/CMUE PMU CMUA/CMUE PMU CMUA/CMUE
MON0 / MON1
TO PMU DB50
COM
Cable to be
BBU BBU
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C) IBBS TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C) IBBS IBBS
CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE
(Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs or with additional
1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs when the BBU is installed in the APM30H
(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).

DBS3900
Figure 6-5 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs
TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C) APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C) TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C) APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C) APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
COM_IN / COM1
CMUA/CMUE HPMI CMUA/CMUE HPMI HPMI
COM_OUT / COM2
PMU CMUA/CMUE PMU CMUA/CMUE PMU CMUA/CMUE COM_485
MON0 / MON1
TO PMU DB50
COM
BBU BBU Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
IBBS IBBS IBBS IBBS IBBS IBBS
CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE
Figure 6-6 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are powered
and monitored by the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) in the outdoor scenario.
Figure 6-6 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are powered and
monitored by the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
Figure 6-7 illustrates the monitoring scheme when two the BBU is configured in one of the two
TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) configured for the DBS3900.
Figure 6-7 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a TMC11H
(Ver.B)

DBS3900
Figure 6-8 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply scenario.
Figure 6-8 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H
(Ver.B) in the +24 DC power supply scenario
COM_IN APM30H(+24V,Ver.B)
ALM
CMUA
PRESENT
MON0 / MON1
EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1 Power System
Cable to be (DC/DC)
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery BBU
Monitoring from
Monitoring Scheme for a Triple-Mode Base Station

NOTE
BBU0 is the main or root BBU, and BBU1 is the extension or leaf BBU.
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU0 is installed in the main APM30H
(Ver.B) or main APM30H (Ver.C) on the left. BBU1 is installed in the extension APM30H
(Ver.B) or extension APM30H (Ver.C) on the right. In a triple-mode base station, all monitoring
devices are connected to BBU0. The monitoring scheme for a triple-mode base station is the
same as a single- or dual-mode base station, as shown in Figure 6-9, Figure 6-10, and Figure
6-11.
Figure 6-9 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)/
APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs

DBS3900
Figure 6-10 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)/
APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBSs
Figure 6-11 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBUs are installed in the TMC11Hs
(Ver.B)/TMC11Hs (Ver.C)
6.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H

(Ver.D)
The APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect alarms from
components such as sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on
the BBU through the RS485 serial bus.
Cabinet Monitoring Scheme for a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station

the APM30H (Ver.D).

DBS3900
NOTE
The devices monitored by the CMUEA, CMUF, and PMU are not shown in the figures. For details, see
the description about the boards.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUEA, see Central Monitoring Unit Type
EA (CMUEA).
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUF, see CMUF.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU.
(Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D/T (Ver.D) when the BBU is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.D) that is supplied with 220 V AC power.
Figure 6-12 Monitoring scheme for a DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1
TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D/T (Ver.D)
(Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds/Ts (Ver.D) when the BBU is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds/Ts (Ver.D)

DBS3900
The following figure illustrates the monitoring scheme for the base station configured with of 1
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D/T when the BBU is installed in the
NOTE
The monitoring board in an IBBS700D cabinet is the CMUEA and the monitoring board in an IBBS700T
cabinet is the CMUF.
Figure 6-14 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1
TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D/T
Figure 6-15 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are
powered and monitored by the APM30H (Ver.D) that is supplied with 220 V AC power.
Figure 6-15 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are powered and
monitored by the APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-16 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with two TMC11Hs
(Ver.D) when the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D) that is supplied with -48 V DC power.

DBS3900
Figure 6-16 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a TMC11H
(Ver.D)

NOTE
BBU 0 is the primary or root BBU, and BBU 1 is the secondary or leaf BBU.
When the 220 V AC external power supply is used, both BBUs in a triple-mode base station can
be installed in one APM30H (Ver.D). BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0. All
monitoring devices are connected to BBU 0. When the base station is also configured with a
transmission cabinet, BBU 1 can be installed either in the APM30H (Ver.D) or in the
transmission cabinet. The two cases use the same monitoring scheme. Figure 6-17 and Figure
6-18 show the monitoring scheme when BBU 1 is installed in the transmission cabinet.
IBBS200D/T (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)

DBS3900
IBBS200Ds/Ts (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
When the -48 V DC external power supply is used, both BBUs in a triple-mode base station can
be installed in one TMC11H (Ver.D). BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0. All
monitoring devices are connected to BBU 0. When the base station is also configured with a
transmission cabinet, BBU 1 can be installed either in the TMC11H (Ver.D) that serves as a
power cabinet or in the transmission cabinet. The two cases use the same monitoring scheme.
Figure 6-19 shows the monitoring scheme when BBU 1 is installed in the transmission cabinet.
Figure 6-19 Monitoring scheme for a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.D)
6.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or

OMB (Ver.C)
The OMB or OMB (Ver.C) cabinet is monitored by various boards or modules. The monitoring
boards or modules collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and report the
alarms to the BBU.

DBS3900
Cabinet Monitoring Principles for a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station

NOTE
The equipment monitored by the boards or modules is not shown in the figures. For details, see the
description about each board or module.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUB, see HEUB.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU in the OMB, see AC/DC Power
Equipment.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU 11A in the OMB (Ver.C), see PMU
11A.
l Figure 6-20 shows the monitoring principles when the BBU is installed in the OMB in the
110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 6-21 shows the monitoring
principles for the cabinet using the -48 V DC power supply.
Figure 6-20 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an AC
OMB
Figure 6-21 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a DC
OMB
l Figure 6-22 shows the monitoring principles when the BBU is installed in the OMB (Ver.C)
in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 6-23 shows the monitoring
principles for the cabinet using the -48 V DC power supply.
Figure 6-22 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an AC
OMB (Ver.C)

DBS3900
Figure 6-23 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a DC
OMB (Ver.C)
6.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03

or IFS06
The IMB03 or IMB03+IFS06 cabinet is monitored by various boards or modules. The
monitoring boards or modules collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and
report the alarms to the BBU. IMB is short for indoor mini box, IFS is short for indoor floor
installation support, and BBU is short for baseband unit.

NOTE
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU on the AC/DC power equipment in the
IMB03, see AC/DC Power Equipment.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU in the AC/DC power system in the
IMB03, see PMU.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the DC/DC power system, see Power Subrack
(DC/DC).
NOTE
The equipment monitored by the boards or modules is not shown in the figures. For details, see the
description about each board or module.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the DC/DC power system, see Power Subrack
(DC/DC).

Figure 6-24 shows the monitoring principles for the DBS3900 applying the indoor solution of
BBU+RRU+IMB03 using the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply. In this solution, the BBU
is installed in the IMB03, and the RRUs are installed remotely outside the IMB03.
Figure 6-24 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+IMB03 (110 V/220 V)
scenario
IMB03
RS485
MON0 / MON1 BBU
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery PMU
Monitoring from

DBS3900
Figure 6-25 illustrates the monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the indoor solution of BBU
+RRU+IMB03+IFS06 using the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply. In this solution, the
BBU is installed in the IMB03, and the RRUs are installed on the IFS06. Figure 6-26 shows the
monitoring principles for the cabinet using the +24 V DC power supply.
Figure 6-25 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+IMB03+IFS06 (110 V/
220 V) scenario
IMB03
COM_IN / COM1
BBU
MON0 / MON1
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected IMB03
before delivery
Monitoring from
source to destination PMU
Figure 6-26 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+IMB03+IFS06 (+24 V)
scenario
IMB03
ALM
PRESENT
BBU
EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected IMB03
before delivery
Monitoring from Power System
source to destination (DC/DC)
Monitoring Principles for a Triple-Mode Base Station

NOTE
l The indoor solution of BBU+RRU+IMB03 does not support the triple-mode scenario. The solution of
BBU+RRU+IMB03+IFS06 supports the triple-mode scenario.
l BBU 0 is the primary or root BBU, and BBU 1 is the secondary or leaf BBU.
When the indoor solution of BBU+RRU+ICR is used in the triple-mode scenario, two BBUs
need to be configured: BBU 0 and BBU 1. BBU 0 is installed in No.0 IMB03. It monitors No.
0 IMB03 and No.1 IMB03. BBU 1 is installed in No.3 IMB03. It monitors No.2 IMB03 and No.
3 IMB03. For details, see Figure 6-27 and Figure 6-28.
Figure 6-27 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (110 V/220 V)
scenario

DBS3900
Figure 6-28 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (-48 V) scenario
6.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the

TP48600A Cabinet
The TP48600A cabinet is monitored by the CCU, CMUF, and PMU. The boards collect alarms
from sensors and fans, and transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU through the
RS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.
Cabinet Monitoring Schemes of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station

A single-mode or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is
installed in the TP48600A cabinet. Figure 6-29 shows the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900
configured with 1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure 6-30 shows the monitoring scheme
for the DBS3900 configured with 1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T.
NOTE
The devices monitored by the CCU, CMUF, and PMU are not shown in the figures. For details, see the
description about the boards. For monitoring of the EMUA, see 6.7 Customized Alarm Input.
l For the functions of the ports on the CMUF, see CMUF.
l For the functions of the ports on the PMU, see PMU.
l For the functions of the ports on the CCU, see CCU.
l For the positions of the CCU, CMUF, and PMU in different cabinets, see Configurations of Cabinets
Used by the DBS3900.
l When a BBU is configured with a UPEU and a UEIU or two UPEUs, the CCU can only be connected
to the MON0 port on one of the boards, the MON0 port on the other board must not be used, and the
MON1 ports cannot be connected to the CCU.

DBS3900
Figure 6-29 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1
TMC11H (Ver.C)
TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
NOTE
If a device is not configured at a site, the monitoring signal cable is directly connected to the lower-level
device. For example, if the HAU0 and HAU1 shown in Figure 6-29 are not configured, the monitoring
signal cable can directly connect the RS485 port on the EMUA to the CCU.

DBS3900

Two BBUs are configured in a triple-mode base station, and the two BBUs are installed in the
TP48600A cabinet. Figure 6-31 shows the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with
1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure 6-32 shows the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900
configured with 1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T.
NOTE
In this document, BBU0 and BBU1 are used to exemplify two triple-mode BBUs.
l In a base station to be expanded, BBU0 is installed during initial site construction, and BBU1 is installed
during capacity expansion.
l In a new base station, BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode, and BBU1 works in LTE-
only or UMTS-only mode.
TMC11H (Ver.C)

DBS3900
TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
6.7 Customized Alarm Input

When an alarm is generated by the customer equipment, the alarm must be reported to the BBU.
Customized alarms are reported to the BBU by any of the following methods:
l The alarms are collected by the UPEU/UEIU in the BBU. UPEU is short for universal
power and environment interface unit, and UEIU is short for universal environment
interface unit.
l The alarms are collected by the EMUA/EMUB. For details about software configurations,
see the related initial configuration guide. EMUA/EMUB is short for environment
monitoring unit type A.
Monitoring Board Configurations

Customer equipment monitored by the BBU must report customized alarms to the BBU.
According to the number of required customized alarm inputs, the DBS3900 needs to be
configured with different types of monitoring boards, as listed in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Configurations of monitoring boards in the DBS3900
External Power Application Number of Monitoring Board

Input Scenario Boolean Outputs Configurations
to Be Monitored
-48 V DC/220 V AC Indoor DBS3900 None UPEU

(DBS3900 of which
the BBU is installed 1 to 16 channels UPEU+UEIU
indoors)

DBS3900
External Power Application Number of Monitoring Board

Input Scenario Boolean Outputs Configurations
to Be Monitored
17 to 32 channels UPEU+UEIU
+EMUA/EMUB
Outdoor DBS3900 None UPEU

(DBS3900 of which
the BBU is installed 1 to 16 channels UPEU+UEIU
outdoors) +(2xUSLP2+SLPU)
17 to 32 channels UPEU+UEIU
+EMUA/EMUB
NOTE
l If backup power is required by the BBU, two UPEUs are configured instead of UPEU+UEIU.
l Analog values can be monitored only by the EMUA/EMUB.
l Two universal signal lightning protection unit 2 boards (USLP2s) and one signal lightning protection
unit (SLPU) are delivered together.
l The EMUA/EMUB with sensors can be configured, if required, for the indoor DBS3900.
Using the UPEU/UEIU to collect customized alarms

Each UPEU or UEIU in the BBU supports eight Boolean alarm inputs. A UPEU and a UEIU or
two UPEUs can be configured in a BBU to receive 16 Boolean alarm inputs. If 16 or fewer
customized alarm inputs are required, the UPEU/UEIU is used to collect the customized alarms.
When using this method, connect the equipment to be monitored to the SLPU for surge
protection, and connect the SLPU to the EXT_ALM port on the BBU, as shown in Figure
6-33.
Figure 6-33 Using the UPEU/UEIU to collect customized alarms
Customized alarm signals are transmitted to the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 in the SLPU
and then transferred to the EXT_ALM port on the UPEU/UEIU by using BBU alarm cables.
Table 6-2 describes the mapping between the pins of ports IN0 to IN3 and the customized alarm
numbers.

DBS3900
Table 6-2 Mapping between the pins of ports IN0 to IN3 on the USLP2 and the customized
alarm numbers
Pins of USLP2 in the Upper Slot USLP2 in the Lower Slot

the
Ports IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3
IN0 to
IN3
1 4+ 5+ 0+ 1+ 4+ 5+ 0+ 1+
2 4- 5- 0- 1- 4- 5- 0- 1-
(GND) (GND) (GND) (GND) (GND) (GND) (GND) (GND)
3 6- 7+ 2- 3+ 6- 7+ 2- 3+
(GND) (GND) (GND) (GND)
4 6+ 7- 2+ 3- 6+ 7- 2+ 3-
(GND) (GND) (GND) (GND)
For details about ports on the USLP2, see 3.3.5 USLP2. For details about pin assignment for
the wires of a BBU alarm cable, see 7.2.20 BBU Alarm Cable.
NOTE
The SLPU used as an alarm signal surge protection unit is configured with two USLP2s by default before
delivery. If a BBU is configured with one UPEU, the UPEU must be installed only in the lower slot, and
the USLP2 in slot 2 of the SLPU is not used.
Using the EMUA/EMUB to Collect Customized Alarms

Each EMUA/EMUB supports 32 Boolean alarm inputs and two RS485 signal inputs. When the
DBS3900 requires more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs, the EMUA/EMUB can be used to collect
customized alarms in the following ways:
Customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA/EMUB that connects to the power monitoring
unit (PMU). Then, the PMU reports the alarms to the central monitoring unit type A (CMUA),
CMUE, or CMUEA, which transfers the alarms to the BBU through the MON port. For details
about cable connections, see Figure 6-34.
Figure 6-34 Using the EMUA/EMUB to collect customized alarms (1)
RS-485
SENSOR

DBS3900
Customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA/EMUB that connects to the PMU. Then, the
PMU reports the alarms to the CMUA, CMUE, or CMUEA, which transfers the alarms to the
remote radio unit (RRU) through the MON port. For details about cable connections, see Figure
6-35.
RRU
ALM
COM_OUT COM_IN
COM_IN COM_OUT
CMUA
PMU
EMUA
RS-485
SENSOR
When the DBS3900 uses the TP48600A, customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA/
EMUB that connects to the cabinet control unit (CCU). Then, the CCU transfers the alarms to
the BBU through the MON port. For details about cable connections, see Figure 6-36.
For the position of the alarm input port on the EMUA/EMUB and cable connections between
the EMUA/EMUB and sensors, see the EMUA User Guide and EMUB User Guide.

DBS3900
Hardware Description 7 DBS3900 Cables
7 DBS3900 Cables
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the cable connections in the DBS3900 and BBU3900 cables in various
scenarios.
NOTE
l For the cables in DBS3900 cabinets, see the APM30&BBC&TMC User Guide,
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T
(Ver.B) Product Description, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.C) Product
Description, TP48600A-H17B1 User Manual, and IBBS700D & IBBS700T User Manual.
l For the RRU cables, see the installation guide for the corresponding type of RRU.
7.1 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables, as well
as the interconnection signal cables, for the DBS3900 vary according to the external input power
and combinations of the cabinet configured in the DBS3900.
7.2 BBU3900 Cables

This section describes the exteriors, pin assignment for the wires, and connections of BBU3900
cables.

DBS3900
7.1 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables, as well
as the interconnection signal cables, for the DBS3900 vary according to the external input power
and combinations of the cabinet configured in the DBS3900.
7.1.1 Power Cable Connections

This section describes the power cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)

The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the power distribution unit (PDU), which
converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into –48 V DC power to provides power to customer
equipment. APM30 is short for advanced power module, and APM30H is short for advanced
power module with a heat-exchanger cooler.
NOTE
The BBU of a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) only in a single-mode or dual-
mode scenario.
Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario

When the input power is 110 V/220 V AC power, a distributed base station is configured with
one APM30, one transmission cabinet (TMC), and one battery backup cabinet (BBC). The
APM30 is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC
power and provides power to the BBU, RRUs, and TMC. Figure 7-1 shows the power cable
connections.

DBS3900
Figure 7-1 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC
Table 7-1 lists the power cables.
Table 7-1 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC
Cable No. Cable Description
P1 Input Power Cable of the Power Cabinet
P2 and P5 Power cables for the fan assembly
P3 7.2.3 BBU Power Cable
P4 Input Power Cable of the APM30

Transmission Cabinet
P6 Power Cable for the Batteries
P7 Input Power Cable of the Heater
P8 Input Power Cable of the Heating Film
P9 RRU power cable
Figure 7-2 shows the power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC. The APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the PDU, which
converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU,
RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.A).

DBS3900
Figure 7-2 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1
TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC
Table 7-2 lists the power cable connections.
Table 7-2 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1
TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC
P1 Input Power Cable of the APM30H Power

Cabinet
P4 Input Power Cable of the TMC11H
P6 Power Cable for the Batteries
P7 Input power cable for the heater in the battery

cabinet
P8 Input power cables for the heating film in the

battery cabinet
P9 RRU power cable
When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T,

the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power

DBS3900
into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.A). Figure
7-3 shows the power cable connections.
Figure 7-3 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.A)+1
TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T
Table 7-3 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1
TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T
P1 Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P2 and P5 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P4 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P6 Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
P7 TEC input power cable
P8 RRU power cable

DBS3900
Power Cable Connections in the -48 V AC Power Supply Scenario

When the input power is –48 V DC, a distributed base station uses two TMCs. The TMCs are
configured with direct current distribution unit-03Bs (DCDU-03Bs), which provide power to
the BBU and RRU or transmission equipment. Figure 7-4 shows the power cable connections.
Figure 7-4 Power cable connections in a base station configured with two TMCs
Table 7-4 Power cable connections in a base station configured with two TMCs

P2 Power cables for the fan assembly
P4 RRU power cable
When two TMC11Hs (Ver.A) are configured, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.A) provide
power to the BBU, RRU, or transmission equipment. Figure 7-5 shows the power cable
connections.
Figure 7-5 Power cable connections in a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)

DBS3900
Table 7-5 Power cable connections in a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)

P2 Power cables for the fan assembly
P4 RRU power cable
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
To meet the requirements of 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power inputs, Huawei provides
a series of power equipment, which is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H(Ver.C).
The power equipment converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides
power to customer equipment.

When a single- or dual-mode base station is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1
TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D, the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with an EPS, which
converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides the power for the
BBU, RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.B). Figure 7-6 shows the power cable connections.

DBS3900
Figure 7-6 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D
Table 7-6 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D
P1 and P10 Power cable for the junction box
P5 Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D
P7 RRU power cable
P9 Power Cable for the Heating Film in the

IBBS200D

DBS3900
When a single- or dual-mode base station is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1

TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D, the APM30H (Ver.C) is configured with an EPU, which
BBU, RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure 7-7 shows the power cable connections.
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D
P1 Power Cable for the Fan Assembly in the

APM30H
P2 Input Power Cable for the Junction Box
P3 and P4 Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D
P6 RRU power cable

DBS3900
P9 Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D

TMC11H
(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200T.
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200T
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200T

DBS3900
P5 Power Cables for the TEC in the IBBS200T
P7 RRU power cable
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200T.
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200T

DBS3900
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200T

APM30H
P2 Input Power Cable for the Junction Box
P3 Power Cable for the AC Heater
P5 RRU power cable
P7 Power Cables for Storage Batteries
P8 Power Cables for the TEC

TMC11H
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds.
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds

DBS3900
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds
P5 and P13 Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D
P8 RRU power cable
P9 Power cable for the heating film
P4 and P14 Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds.

DBS3900
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds

APM30H
P2 and P4 Input Power Cable for the Junction Box
P3 Power Cable for the Heating Film
P6 RRU power cable
P9 and P13 Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D

TMC11H

DBS3900
P8 and P12 Power Cables for Storage Batteries
(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ts.
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ts
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ts
P5 and P12 Power Cables for the TEC in the IBBS200T

DBS3900
P8 RRU power cable
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ts.
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ts
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ts

APM30H
P2 and P3 Input Power Cable for the Junction Box

DBS3900
P5 RRU power cable
P8 and P11 Power Cables for the TEC

TMC11H
P7 and P12 Power Cables for Storage Batteries
If the DBS3900 serves as a triple-mode base station, it needs to be configured with two BBUs:
BBU0 and BBU1. The power cable connections in the cabinet housing BBU0 are the same as
those in the cabinet housing BBU1. Figure 7-14 and Figure 7-15 show the power cable
connections in a triple-mode base station, using the scenario of BBUs in APM30Hs (Ver.B) as
an example.
Figure 7-14 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds

DBS3900
Table 7-14 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
P5 Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D
P7 RRU power cable
Figure 7-15 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
P2 P2
P12
P11
P1 P1
P9 P9 P7 P9 P7
P10
P10
P3 P3
BBU0 BBU1
P6 P6
P4 P4
P5 P5
P13 P13
P14 P14
P8 P8
Table 7-15 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 2 APM30Hs

DBS3900
P2, P6, and P12 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P5 and P13 Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D
P8 RRU power cable

When two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) are configured for a single- or dual-mode base station, the
DCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.B) provide power to the BBU, RRUs, or transmission
equipment. Figure 7-16 shows the power cable connections.
Figure 7-16 Power cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) configured for a single- or dual-
mode base station
Table 7-16 Power cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) configured for a single- or dual-
mode base station
P2 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H

DBS3900
P4 RRU power cable
When two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) are configured for a single- or dual-mode base station, the
DCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.C) provide power to the BBU, RRUs, or transmission
equipment. Figure 7-17 shows the power cable connections.
Figure 7-17 Power cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a single- or dual-
mode base station
Table 7-17 Power cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a single- or dual-
mode base station

TMC11H
P4 RRU power cable
Power Cable Connections in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario

If a single- or dual-mode base station uses an APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V), the DC/DC power
equipment in the APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V) converts the +24 V DC power into -48 V DC power
and forwards the power to the DCDU-03B, which then distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs,
and other components in the cabinet. Figure 7-18 shows the power cable connections.

DBS3900
Figure 7-18 Power cable connections in an APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V) configured for a single-
or dual-mode base station
Table 7-18 Power cable connections in an APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V) configured for a single- or
dual-mode base station
P1 Input power cable for the DC/DC power

equipment
P2 Input power cable for the DCDU-03B
P4 RRU power cable
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)

To meet the requirements of 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power inputs, Huawei provides
a series of power equipment, which is installed in the APM30H (Ver.D). The power equipment
converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to customer
equipment.

NOTE
l When a base station is configured with 7 to 12 RRUs, a DCDU-12B must be installed below the BBU
to provide power for the seventh to twelfth RRUs.
l When a base station is configured with 13 to 15 RRUs, a DCDU-12B must be installed below the BBU
to provide power for the seventh to twelfth RRUs, and an ODM must be configured to obtain power
from the DCDU-12B and provide the power to the remaining RRUs.
This section uses the power cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with 15 RRUs as an example.
When a single- or dual-mode base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D), the APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with an EPU, which converts
110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power for the BBU, RRUs,

DBS3900
TMC11H (Ver.D), and IBBS200D (Ver.D). Figure 7-19 shows the power cable connections in
this scenario.
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D)
P1 and P11 Input Power Cable for a Junction Box
P2 and P8 Power Cables for a Fan Assembly
P4 Power Cables in a Battery Cabinet
P5 TEC Power Cables
P6 Input Power Cable for the APM30H
P7 RRU power cable
P9 Input Power Cable for a TMC11H
P10 Power Cable for a Heating Film

DBS3900
P12 DCDU-12B Input Power Cable
P13 ODM06D Power Cable
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D), the APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with an EPU, which converts
110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides the power for the BBU, RRUs,
TMC11H (Ver.D), and IBBS200T (Ver.D). Figure 7-20 shows the power cable connections in
this scenario.
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)

DBS3900
P5 TEC Power Cables
P7 RRU power cable
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D), the APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with an EPU, which converts
110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power for the BBU, RRUs,
TMC11H (Ver.D), and IBBS200D (Ver.D). Figure 7-21 shows the power cable connections in
this scenario.

DBS3900
P4 and P13 Power Cables in a Battery Cabinet
P5 and P14 Power Cables for the Fan in an IBBS200D
P7 RRU power cable
The following figure shows the power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with of 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D/T.
NOTE
This section uses describes the power cable connections in the IBBS700D. The power cable connections
in the IBBS700T are the same as those in the IBBS700D.

DBS3900
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D
The following table describes the power cables.
Table 7-22 Power cables in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D
No. Description
P1, P10, and P11 Power Cable for an AC Junction Box
P2 and P8 FAN 02D Power Cable
P4 Power Cable for a Power Distribution Box
P5 Power Cables for the Temperature Control

System
P6 EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 Power Cable
P7 RRU power cable
P9 DCDU-12C Power Cable
P12 DCDU-12B Power Cable

DBS3900
No. Description
(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D), the APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with an EPU, which
BBU, RRUs, TMC11H (Ver.D), and IBBS200Ts (Ver.D). Figure 7-23 shows the power cable
connections in this scenario.
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)

DBS3900
P5 and P14 TEC Power Cables
P7 RRU power cable
Figure 7-24 shows the power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1
IBBS200D (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D),
BBU +1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same as
those in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in Figure
7-24.
Figure 7-24 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D
(Ver.D)

DBS3900
Table 7-24 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D
(Ver.D)
P5 Power Cables for the Fan in an IBBS200D
P7 RRU power cable
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1
IBBS200T (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D),
BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same as
those in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in Figure
7-25.

DBS3900
Figure 7-25 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with +1 APM30H
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T
(Ver.D)
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T
(Ver.D)
P5 TEC Power Cables
P7 RRU power cable

DBS3900
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2
IBBS200Ds (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D),
BBU +2 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same as
those in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in
Figure 7-26.
(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds
(Ver.D)
(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds
(Ver.D)
P5 and P14 Power Cables for the Fan in an IBBS200D
P7 RRU power cable

DBS3900
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2
IBBS200Ts (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D),
BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same as
those in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in Figure
7-27.
(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts
(Ver.D)

DBS3900
(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts
(Ver.D)
P5 and P14 TEC Power Cables
P7 RRU power cable

When one TMC11H (Ver.D) is configured for a single- or dual-mode base station, the
DCDU-03B in the TMC11H (Ver.D) provides power for the BBU, RRUs, or transmission
equipment. Figure 7-28 lists the power cable connections.
Figure 7-28 Power cable connections in one TMC11H (Ver.D) configured for a single- or dual-
mode base station

DBS3900
Table 7-28 Power cable connections in one TMC11H (Ver.D) configured for a single- or dual-
mode base station
P3 Power Cables for a Fan Assembly
P4 RRU power cable
one or two TMC11Hs (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.D), BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below
BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same as those in a base station configured with one
TMC11H (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in Figure 7-29.
Figure 7-29 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with one or two
TMC11Hs (Ver.D)
Table 7-29 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with one or two
TMC11Hs (Ver.D)
P3 Power Cables for a Fan Assembly
P4 RRU power cable

DBS3900
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C)

To use the 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power, the DBS3900 installed outdoors can be
configured with OMB or OMB (Ver.C). The OMB or OMB (Ver.C) can be configured with an
AC/DC power equipment or an embedded telecommunication power A1 (ETP48100-A1) to
convert the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power, which is supplied to the
components in the OMB or OMB (Ver.C).

Figure 7-30 shows the power cable connections for the AC OMB configured for the DBS3900.
Figure 7-30 Power cable connections for the AC OMB
Table 7-30 describes the power cable connections.
Table 7-30 Power cable connections for the AC OMB
P1 Power cable for the inner air circulation fan
P2 HEUA power cable
P4 Input power cable for the direct current

distribution unit (DCDU)
P5 Power cable for the outer air circulation fan
P6 Input power cable for the AC/DC power

equipment

DBS3900
P7 AC input power cable for the OMB
P8 RRU power cable
Figure 7-31 shows the power cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C) configured for the
DBS3900.
Figure 7-31 Power cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C)
Table 7-31 Power cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C)
P1 HEUB Power Cable
P3 ETP48100-A1 Power Cable
P4 PDU10D-01 Power Cable
P5 RRU power cable

DBS3900
P6 AC Input Power Cable
Power Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

Figure 7-32 shows the power cable connections for the DC OMB configured for the DBS3900.
Figure 7-32 Power cable connections for the DC OMB
Table 7-32 Power cable connections for the DC OMB
P1 Power cable for the inner air circulation fan
P2 HEUA power cable
P3 Power cable for the outer air circulation fan
P5 DC input power cable for the OMB
P6 RRU power cable
Figure 7-33 shows the power cable connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C) configured for the
DBS3900.

DBS3900
Figure 7-33 Power Cable Connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C)
Table 7-33 Power cable connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C)
P1 HEUB Power Cable
P3 RRU power cable
P4 DC Input Power Cable
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the TP48600A

The TP48600A cabinet can be configured with the PDU05A-3 and ETP to use the 110 V AC or
220 V AC power supply. The PDU05A-3 distributes AC power and the ETP distributes DC
power to components in the cabinet.
Figure 7-34 shows the power cable connections in the following scenario: The DBS3900 is
configured with 1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H (Ver.C), and two BBUs are
installed in the TP48600A that uses the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply. The power cable
connections for an IBBS700T and the power cable connections for an IBBS700D are the same.
Therefore, this section describes only the power cable connections for an IBBS700D.

DBS3900
NOTE
If only one BBU is installed in the TP48600A, two BBU power cables are required.
Figure 7-34 Power cable connections in the DBS3900 configured with 1 TP48600A+1
IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Table 7-34 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 TP48600A+1
IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
P1 AC input power cable
P2 to P5 7.2.3 BBU Power Cable
P7 Power Cable for the Temperature Control

System in a Battery Cabinet
P8 Input power cable for storage batteries
P9 Input power cable for a junction box
P10 to P21 RRU power cable
7.1.2 Transmission Cable Connections

This section describes the transmission cable connections in the indoor and outdoor DBS3900
base stations in different modes.

DBS3900
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Single-Mode Base Station

In GSM only, UMTS only, or LTE only mode, use the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, or optical
cable to transmit data. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.
Configuration Principles
l In LTE only mode, use preferentially the FE/GE optical cable to transmit data.
l The E1/T1 cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UELP of the SLPU. After the
surge protection, the E1/T1 cable is led from the T2 port on the UELP.
l The FE/GE cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UFLP of the SLPU. After the
surge protection, the FE/GE cable is led from the T2 port on the UFLP.
l The FE/GE optical cable does not require surge protection, and therefore it is not connected
to the SLPU.
Application Scenario
Table 7-35 describes the transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station in
different modes.
Table 7-35 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station
Trans Mode Application Scenario Legend

missi Supp
on orted
Mode
Trans GSM Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The "1" in the
missio only transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on Figure 7-35
n over the GTMU. shows the cable
the E1 Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission connections in
Cable cables are connected to the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU scenario 1.
and UTRP.
UMTS Scenario 1: The UTRP is configured. The transmission "2" in the

only cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. Figure 7-35
Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The shows the cable
transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on connections in
the WMPT or UMPT. scenario 1.
LTE The UMPT is configured. The transmission cable is "3" in Figure

only connected to the E1/T1 port on the UMPT. 7-35 shows the
cable
connections.

DBS3900

missi Supp
on orted
Mode
Trans GSM Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The "4" in the

missio only transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical Figure 7-35
n over port or electrical port on the UTRPc. shows the cable
the FE Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The connections in
Cable transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical scenario 1.
port on the GTMU.
Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port on the GTMU.
UMTS Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The "5" in the

only transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical Figure 7-35
port or electrical port on the UTRPc. shows the cable
Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. The connections in
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical scenario 1.
port on the UTRP2.
Scenario 3: The UTRP9 is configured. The
port on the UTRP9.
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port or electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.
LTE Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The "6" in the

only transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical Figure 7-35
Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The connections in
port or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT.
Figure 7-35 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.

DBS3900
Figure 7-35 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station
T1: 7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer T2: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
Cable
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Single-Mode Base Station

In GSM only, UMTS only, or LTE only mode, use the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, or optical
cable to transmit data. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.
Configuration principles
l In LTE only mode, use preferentially the FE/GE optical cable to transmit data.
Table 7-36 describes the transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station in
different transmission modes.

DBS3900
Table 7-36 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station

missi Supp
on orted
Mode
Trans GSM Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The "1" in the
missio Only transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on Figure 7-36
n over the GTMU. shows the cable
the E1 Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission connections in
Cable cables are connected to the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU scenario 1.
and UTRP.
UMTS Scenario 1: The UTRP is configured. The transmission "2" in the

Only cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. Figure 7-36
Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The shows the cable
transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on connections in
the WMPT or UMPT. scenario 1.
LTE The UMPT is configured. The transmission cable is "3" in the

Only connected to the E1/T1 port on the UMPT. Figure 7-36
shows the cable
connections.
Trans GSM Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The "4" in the

missio Only transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical Figure 7-36
n over port or electrical port on the UTRPc. shows the cable
the FE Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The connections in
Cable transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical scenario 1.
port on the GTMU.
port on the GTMU.

Only transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical Figure 7-36
Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. The connections in
port on the UTRP2.
Scenario 3: The UTRP9 is configured. The
port on the UTRP9.
port or electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.

DBS3900

missi Supp
on orted
Mode
LTE Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The "6" in the

Only transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical Figure 7-36
port or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT.
Figure 7-36 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station
T1: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T2: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic -

Cable
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Co-

Transmission Mode
In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, common transmission can be used. This
section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.

DBS3900
l In GSM+UMTS mode using TDM common transmission, the transmission cables are
connected to the GTMU or the UTRP on the GTMU.
l In GSM+UMTS mode using IP common transmission, the transmission cables are
connected to the WMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the UMTS side.
l In GSM+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT or
UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
l In UMTS+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT
or UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
to the SLPU.
Table 7-37 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in different
transmission modes.
Table 7-37 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common
transmission mode

missi Supp
on orted
Mode
TDM GSM Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The "1" in the
Comm +UMT transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on Figure 7-37
on S the GTMU. shows the cable
Trans Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission connections in
missio cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. scenario 1.
n
IP GSM Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The "2" in the

Over +UMT transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on Figure 7-37
E1/T1 S the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is shows the cable
Comm interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port connections in
on or optical port. scenario 1.
Trans Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission
missio cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The
n WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using
the electrical port or optical port.

DBS3900

missi Supp
on orted
Mode
GSM The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is "3" in Figure

+LTE connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPT 7-37 shows the
or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the cable
electrical port or optical port. connections.
UMTS The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is "4" in the

+LTE connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPT Figure 7-37
or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT shows the cable
using the electrical port or optical port. connections.
IP over GSM Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The "5" in the

FE/GE +UMT transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical Figure 7-37
Comm S port or electrical port on the UTRPc. shows the cable
on Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. The connections in
Trans transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical scenario 1.
missio port on the UTRP2. The GTMU is interconnected to
n the UTRP using the optical port.
port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.
interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port.
port or optical port on the WMPT or UMPT. The
WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU
through the backplane.

DBS3900

missi Supp
on orted
Mode
GSM Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The "6" in the

+LTE transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical Figure 7-37
port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
port or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT
or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU through the
backplane.

interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the
electrical port.
optical port.
or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT
Route GSM Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "8" in the
Backu +UMT the electrical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-37
p S GTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the shows the cable
Mode GTMU using the optical port. connections in
with IP Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to scenario 1.
Comm the optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the
on GTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the
Trans GTMU using the electrical port.

DBS3900

missi Supp
on orted
Mode
missio GSM Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "9" in the
n +LTE the electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-37
GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the shows the cable
GTMU using the optical port. connections in
Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to scenario 1.
the optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the
GTMU using the electrical port.
UMTS Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "10" in the

+LTE the electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-37
WMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is shows the cable
interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the connections in
optical port. scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to
WMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
optical port.
Hybrid UMTS Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "11" in the
Trans +LTE the optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-37
missio LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is shows the cable
n interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the connections in
electrical port. scenario 1.
the optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the
LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
electrical port.

DBS3900
Figure 7-37 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common
transmission mode
T1: 7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge T2: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.2.8 Interconnection T4: 7.2.10 FE/GE
Protection Transfer Cable Cable Between the FE Fiber Optic Cable
Electrical Ports
T5: 7.2.9 Interconnection T6: 7.2.7 FE Surge T7: FE/GE Ethernet Cable -
Cable Between FE Optical Protection Transfer
Ports Cable
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Co-

Transmission Mode
In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, common transmission can be used. This
l In GSM+UMTS mode using TDM common transmission, the transmission cables are
connected to the GTMU or the UTRP on the GTMU.

DBS3900
l In GSM+UMTS mode using IP common transmission, the transmission cables are

connected to the WMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the UMTS side.
l In GSM+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT or
UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
l In UMTS+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT
or UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
transmission modes.
Table 7-38 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common
transmission mode

missi Supp
on orted
Mode
TDM GSM Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The "1" in the
Comm +UMT transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on Figure 7-38
on S the GTMU. shows the cable
Trans Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission connections in
missio cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. scenario 1.
n
IP GSM Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The "2" in the

Over +UMT transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on Figure 7-38
E1/T1 S the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is shows the cable
Comm interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port connections in
on or optical port. scenario 1.
Trans Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission
missio cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The
n WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using
the electrical port or optical port.
GSM The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is "3" in the

or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the shows the cable
electrical port or optical port. connections.
UMTS The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is "4" in the

or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT shows the cable
using the electrical port or optical port. connections.

DBS3900

missi Supp
on orted
Mode
IP over GSM Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The "5" in the

FE/GE +UMT transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical Figure 7-38
Comm S port or electrical port on the UTRPc. shows the cable
on Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. The connections in
Trans transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical scenario 1.
missio port on the UTRP2. The GTMU is interconnected to
n the UTRP using the optical port.
port or optical port on the WMPT or UMPT. The
WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU
GSM Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The "6" in the

or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU through the
backplane.

DBS3900

missi Supp
on orted
Mode

electrical port.
optical port.
or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT
Route GSM Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "8" in the
Backu +UMT the electrical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-38
p S GTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the shows the cable
Mode GTMU using the optical port. connections in
with IP Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to scenario 1.
Comm the optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the
on GTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the
Trans GTMU using the electrical port.
missio
n GSM Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "9" in the
GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the shows the cable
GTMU using the optical port. connections in
Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to scenario 1.
GTMU using the electrical port.
GTMU through the backplane.

DBS3900

missi Supp
on orted
Mode
UMTS Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "10" in the

WMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is shows the cable
interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the connections in
optical port. scenario 1.
WMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
optical port.
Hybrid UMTS Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "11" in the
Trans +LTE the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE/GE Figure 7-38
missio optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or shows the cable
n UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using connections in
the electrical port. scenario 1.
the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE/GE
electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or
UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using
the optical port.

DBS3900
Figure 7-38 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common
transmission mode
T1: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T2: 7.2.8 Interconnection Cable T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber
Between the FE Electrical Ports Optic Cable
T4: 7.2.9 Interconnection Cable T5: FE/GE Ethernet Cable -

Between FE Optical Ports

DBS3900
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Dual-Mode Base Station in

Separate Transmission Mode
In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, independent transmission can be used. This
to the SLPU.
transmission modes.
Table 7-39 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in independent
transmission mode

missi Supp
on orted
Mode
GSM GSM The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 "1" in the
E1/T1 +UMT port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. Figure 7-39
+UMT S shows the cable
S E1/ connections.
T1
GSM GSM Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "2" in the
FE/GE +UMT the FE optical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-39
+UMT S GTMU. shows the cable
S FE/ Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to connections in
GE the FE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the scenario 1.
GTMU.
GSM GSM Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The "3" in the
E1/T1 +LTE transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on Figure 7-39
+LTE the GTMU and the FE optical or electrical port on the shows the cable
FE/GE LMPT or UMPT. connections in
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the GSM side. scenario 1.
The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1
ports on the GTMU and UTRP and to the FE electrical
or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT.

DBS3900

missi Supp
on orted
Mode
UMTS GSM Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "4" in the
FE/GE +LTE the FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-39
+LTE GTMU. shows the cable
FE/GE Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to connections in
the FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FE scenario 1.
electrical port on the GTMU.
UMTS UMTS Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The "5" in the
E1/T1 +LTE transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on Figure 7-39
+LTE the WMPT or UMPT and the FE optical or electrical shows the cable
FE/GE port on the LMPT or UMPT. connections in
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the UMTS scenario 1.
side. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1
port on the UTRP and to the FE electrical or optical
port on the LMPT or UMPT.
UMTS UMTS Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "6" in the
FE/GE +LTE the FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-39
+LTE WMPT or UMPT. shows the cable
electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.

DBS3900
Figure 7-39 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in independent
transmission mode
T1: 7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge T2: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber T4: 7.2.7 FE Surge
Protection Transfer Cable Optic Cable Protection Transfer Cable
T5: FE/GE Ethernet Cable - - -
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Separate

Transmission Mode
In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, independent transmission can be used. This
transmission modes.

DBS3900
Table 7-40 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in non-common
transmission mode

missi Supp
on orted
Mode
GSM GU The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 "1" in the
E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. Figure 7-40
+UMT shows the cable
S E1/ connections.
T1
GSM GU Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "2" in the

FE/GE the FE optical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-40
+UMT GTMU. shows the cable
S FE/ Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to connections in
GE the FE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the scenario 1.
GTMU.
GSM GL Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The "3" in the

E1/T1 transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on Figure 7-40
+LTE the GTMU and the FE optical or electrical port on the shows the cable
FE/GE LMPT or UMPT. connections in
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the GSM side. scenario 1.
The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1
ports on the GTMU and UTRP and to the FE electrical
or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT.
UMTS GL Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "4" in the

FE/GE the FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-40
+LTE GTMU. shows the cable
electrical port on the GTMU.
UMTS UL Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The "5" in the

E1/T1 transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on Figure 7-40
+LTE the WMPT or UMPT and the FE optical or electrical shows the cable
FE/GE port on the LMPT or UMPT. connections in
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the UMTS scenario 1.
side. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1
port on the UTRP and to the FE electrical or optical
port on the LMPT or UMPT.

DBS3900

missi Supp
on orted
Mode
UMTS UL Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "6" in the

FE/GE the FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-40
+LTE WMPT or UMPT. shows the cable
electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.
Figure 7-40 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in non-common
transmission mode
T1: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
T5: FE/GE Ethernet Cable -
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Triple-Mode Base Station

This section describes the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.

DBS3900
In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding.
l In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction,
and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.
l In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode,
and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.
l The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL
+UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while
the UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
Table 7-41 lists the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
Table 7-41 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station
Triple Mode Mode Specification Reference
GU (BBU0) + LO (BBU1) BBU0 works in GSM l In dual mode, common

(BBUs not cascaded) +UMTS mode and BBU1 and independent
works in LTE only mode. transmission are
supported. For details, see
GL (BBU0) + UO (BBU1) BBU0 works in GSM+LTE the Transmission Cable
(BBUs not cascaded) mode and BBU1 works in Connections for a Dual-
UMTS only mode. Mode Base Station in
UO (BBU0) + GL (BBU1) BBU0 works in UMTS only Common Transmission
(BBUs not cascaded) mode and BBU1 works in Mode and the
GSM+LTE mode. Transmission Cable
Connections for a Dual-
GO (BBU0) + UL (BBU1) BBU0 works in GSM only Mode Base Station in
(BBUs not cascaded) mode and BBU1 works in Independent
UMTS+LTE mode. Transmission Mode.
l For details about the
transmission cable
connections for a single-
mode base station, see the
Transmission Cable
Connections for a Single-
Mode Base Station.
GU (BBU0) + LO (BBU1) BBU0 works in GSM For details, see the "1" or the
(BBUs cascaded) +UMTS mode and BBU1 "2" in the Figure 7-41.
works in LTE only mode.
GL (BBU0) + UO (BBU1) BBU0 works in GSM+LTE For details, see the "3" or the
(BBUs cascaded) mode and BBU1 works in "4" in the Figure 7-41.
UMTS only mode.
GU (BBU0) + UL (BBU1) BBU0 works in GSM For details, see the "5" in the
(BBUs cascaded) +UMTS mode and BBU1 Figure 7-41.
works in UMTS+LTE mode.
Figure 7-41 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.

DBS3900
Figure 7-41 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station
T1: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Triple-Mode Base Station

This section describes the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding.
l The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL
+UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while
the UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
Table 7-42 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
Table 7-42 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station
Triple-Mode Scenario Mode Specification Reference
GU (BBU 0)+LO (BBU 1) BBU 0 works in GSM l Dual-mode includes

(BBU Not Cascaded) +UMTS mode and BBU 1 common and non-
works in LTE only mode. common transmission.

DBS3900
Triple-Mode Scenario Mode Specification Reference
GL (BBU 0)+UO (BBU 1) BBU 0 works in GSM+LTE For details, see the
(BBU Not Cascaded) mode and BBU 1 works in Transmission Cable
UMTS only mode. Connections for a Dual-
Mode Base Station in
UO (BBU 0)+GL (BBU 1) BBU 0 works in UMTS only Common Transmission
(BBU Not Cascaded) mode and BBU 1 works in Mode and the
GSM+LTE mode. Transmission Cable
GO (BBU 0)+UL (BBU 1) BBU 0 works in GSM only Connections for a Dual-
(BBU Not Cascaded) mode and BBU 1 works in Mode Base Station in
UMTS+LTE mode. Non-Common
Transmission Mode.
l For details about the
transmission cable
connections for a single-
mode base station, see the
Transmission Cable
Connections for a Single-
Mode Base Station.
GU (BBU 0)+LO (BBU 1) BBU 0 works in GSM For details, see the "1" or
(BBU Cascaded) +UMTS mode and BBU 1 "2" in the Figure 7-42
works in LTE only mode.
GL (BBU 0)+UO (BBU 1) BBU 0 works in GSM+LTE For details, see the "3" or
(BBU Cascaded) mode and BBU 1 works in "4" in the Figure 7-42
UMTS only mode.
GU (BBU 0)+UL (BBU 1) BBU 0 works in GSM For details, see the "5" in the
(BBU Cascaded) +UMTS mode and BBU 1 Figure 7-42
works in UMTS+LTE mode.
Figure 7-42 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.

DBS3900
Figure 7-42 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station
T1:7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
7.1.3 CPRI Cable Connections

CPRI cable connections for the DBS3900 depend on the DBS3900 working mode.
NOTE
l Of all RRUs working in GSM mode, the RRU3008 or RRU3004 is used as an example to describe the
CPRI cable connections.
l Of all RRUs working in UMTS mode, the RRU3804 is used as an example to describe the CPRI cable
connections.
l Of all RRUs working in LTE mode, the RRU3201 is used as an example to describe the CPRI cable
connections.
l Of all RRUs working in multiple modes, the RRU3908 is used as an example to describe the CPRI
cable connections.
CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM Only Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in GSM mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections can
be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.
Figure 7-43 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3008s/
RRU3004s work in dual-band mode, six RRUs support three sectors, and a pair of two RRUs
working in the same sector with different bands are cascaded.

DBS3900
Figure 7-43 CPRI cable connections (1)
Figure 7-44 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3008s/
RRU3004s work in dual-band mode, nine RRUs support three sectors, and a group of three
RRUs working in the same sector with different bands are cascaded.
CPRI Cable Connections in the UMTS Only Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in UMTS mode, CPRI cable connections depend on the number of
sectors and frequency bands. UMTS is short for Universal Mobile Telecommunications System,
and CPRI is short for common public radio interface.
Figure 7-45 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The baseband unit
(BBU) is configured with the WBBPb, each RRU3804 works in a single band and do not support
MIMO, and the base station supports three sectors. MIMO is short for multiple-input multiple-
output.

DBS3900
Figure 7-46 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU is
configured with the WBBPb, each RRU3804 works in a single band and supports MIMO or
supports expanded bandwidth and carriers, the base station supports three sectors, and two
RRU3804s working in the same sector are cascaded.
configured with the WBBPd, each RRU3804 works in a single band and supports MIMO or
supports expanded bandwidth and carriers, the base station supports three sectors, and two
RRU3804s working in the same sector are cascaded.

DBS3900
CPRI Cable Connections in the LO Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in LTE mode, CPRI cable connections depend on the number of
sectors and frequency bands. LTE is short for Long Term Evolution, and CPRI is short for
common public radio interface.
NOTE
CPRI cables are connected to CPRI ports on the LBBP sequentially from the CPRI0 port.
configured with the LBBPd1, LBBPd2, or LBBPc, each RRU works in a single band and
supports 2T2R MIMO, and the base station uses 10 MHz or 20 MHz bandwidth and supports
three sectors. BBU is short for baseband unit, RRU is short for remote radio unit, and MIMO is
short for multiple-input multiple-output.
configured with the LBBPd2 or LBBPc, each RRU works in single band and supports 4T4R

DBS3900
MIMO, each pair of RRUs serve one sector, and the base station uses 10 MHz bandwidth and
supports three sectors.
configured with the LBBPc, each RRU works in single band and supports 4T4R MIMO, each
pair of RRUs serve one sector, and the base station uses 20 MHz bandwidth and supports three
sectors.
CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in GSM+UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable
connections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.
Figure 7-51 shows the CPRI cable connections when the RRU3908 works in single-band mode
and three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology support three sectors.

DBS3900
Figure 7-52 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3804s work
in single-band mode, the RRU3804s working in star topology and each supports a sector; the
RRU3008s/RRU3004s work in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and
chain topology correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the
same sector with different bands are cascaded.
in dual-band mode, two RRU3804s correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3804s working
in the same sector with different bands are cascaded; the RRU3008s/RRU3004s work in dual-
band mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and chain topology correspond to a
sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the same sector with different bands
are cascaded.

DBS3900
in single-band mode, three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology correspond to three sectors;
the RRU3008s/RRU3004s work in single-band mode, and three RRU3008s/RRU3004s working
in star topology correspond to three sectors.
CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in GL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector
and frequency band.
in single-band mode and support 2T2R MIMO, three RRU3201s serve three sectors and use the

DBS3900
star topology; the RRU3008s work in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s serving the same sector
with different bands are connected in the star and chain topology.
in dual-band mode, use 20 MHz or 15 MHz bandwidth, and support 2T2R MIMO, all the
RRU3201s serve three sectors and use the star topology; the RRU3008s work in dual-band mode,
two RRU3008s serving the same sector with different bands are connected in the star and chain
topology.
in single-band mode, all the RRU3201s serve three sectors, use 10 MHz bandwidth, support
4T4R MIMO, and the RRU3201s serving the same sector are connected in the dual-star topology;
the RRU3008s work in dual-band mode, and two RRU3008s serving the same sector with
different bands are connected in the star and chain topology.

DBS3900
in single-band mode, three RRU3908s serve three sectors, and the RRU3908s serving the same
sector are connected in the dual-star topology; the RRU3008s work in single-band mode, three
RRU3008s serve three sectors and use the star topology.
CPRI Cable Connections in the UMTS+LTE Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in UMTS+LTE mode, CPRI cable connections depend on the number
of sectors and frequency bands supported by the DBS3900. LTE is short for Long Term
Evolution, and CPRI is short for common public radio interface.
As shown in Figure 7-59, the RRU3201s work in a single frequency band, serve three sectors,
support the 2T2R MIMO technology, and are connected to the BBU by CPRI cables in star
topology; the RRU3804s work in a single frequency band, serve three sectors, are connected to
the BBU by CPRI cables in star topology, but do not support the 2T2R MIMO technology.

DBS3900
As shown in Figure 7-60, the RRU3201s work in dual frequency bands, serve three sectors with
a bandwidth of 20 MHz or 15 MHz, support the 2T2R MIMO technology, and are connected to
the BBU by CPRI cables in star topology; the RRU3804s work in a single frequency band and
are connected to the BBU by CPRI cables in star-chain topology, and two RRU3804s serving
the same sector are cascaded.
As shown in Figure 7-61, the RRU3201s work in a single frequency band, serve three sectors
with a bandwidth of 10 MHz, support the 4T4R MIMO technology; two RRU3201s serving the
same sector are connected to the BBU in dual-star topology; the RRU3804s work in a single
frequency band and serve three sectors, and are connected to the BBU in star-chain topology,
with two RRU3804s serving the same sector cascaded.
Figure 7-62 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRUs use the
CPRI MUX topology, the UMTS mode is configured with the WBBPf, the LTE mode is
configured with the LBBPd, the RRU3929s (1700 MHz) are used as multi-mode RRUs, and all
CPRI cables are connected to the WBBPf; the LBBPd is not connected to any RRUs.

DBS3900
Figure 7-62 CPRI cable connections in CPRI MUX topology
CPRI Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Station

Starting from SingleRAN7.0, Huawei triple-mode base stations support six typical scenarios:
GU+L (BBUs not interconnected), GL+U (BBUs not interconnected), U+GL (BBUs not
interconnected), GU+L (UCIU+UMPT), GL+U (UCIU+UMPT), and GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).
A single BBU can support a maximum of two modes. Therefore, two BBUs are required for a
triple-mode base station. In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for
better understanding.
l The difference between the GL+U (BBUs not interconnected) scenario and U+GL (BBUs
not interconnected) scenario is as follows: The GL+U (BBUs not interconnected) scenario
applies to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while the U+GL (BBUs
not interconnected) scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
l The difference between the GU+L (BBUs not interconnected) scenario and GU+L (UCIU
+UMPT) scenario is as follows: In the GU+L (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, a BBU
in GU mode and a BBU in LO mode are in the same base station but not interconnected.
In the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario, a BBU in GU mode and a BBU in LO mode are in
the same base station are interconnected through the UCIU.
GU+L (BBUs not Interconnected)

In the GU+L scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the
GSM+UMTS Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
In the GU+L scenario, BBU1 works in LTE only mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the LO
Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
GL+U (BBUs not Interconnected)

In the GL+U scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+LTE mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the GL
Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.

DBS3900
In the GL+U scenario, BBU1 works in UMTS only mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the
UMTS Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
U+GL (BBUs not Interconnected)

In the U+GL scenario, BBU0 works in UMTS only mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the
UMTS Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
In this scenario, CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station describes the CPRI cable
connections for BBU1 working in GSM+LTE mode.
GU+L (UCIU+UMPT)
In the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario, BBU0 and BBU1 are interconnected by the UCIU and
UMPT to support the GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes. Figure 7-63 shows the CPRI cable
connections in this scenario.
Figure 7-63 CPRI cable connections in the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario
7.1.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections

This section describes the monitoring signal cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)

The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base station in 110 V
AC/220 V AC and –48 V DC power supply scenarios.

DBS3900
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply

Scenario
NOTE
The BBU of a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) only in a single-mode or dual-
mode scenario.
Figure 7-64 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for the DBS3900 configured with
1 APM30H+1 TMC+1 BBC in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC scenario.
Figure 7-64 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
+1 TMC+1 BBC
Table 7-43 lists the monitoring signal cable connections.
Table 7-43 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
+1 TMC+1 BBC
S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU
S3 7.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable
S4 and S5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status

Sensor

DBS3900
S6 Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for the

Batteries
S7 Monitoring Signal Cable for the APM30

Figure 7-65 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in the DBS3900 configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBC.
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBC
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBC
S1 Environment monitoring signal cable
S3, S7 7.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable

DBS3900

Batteries

Sensor
APM30H (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T.
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T
S3, S7 7.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable

DBS3900
S4 IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable

Sensor
APM30Hs (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 BBCs.
Figure 7-67 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 BBCs
Table 7-46 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 BBCs
S3, S7, and S8 7.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable

DBS3900

Batteries

Sensor
APM30Hs (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 IBBS200Ts.
Figure 7-68 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 IBBS200Ts
Table 7-47 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 IBBS200Ts
S3, S7, and S8 7.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable
S4 IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable

Sensor

DBS3900
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

Figure 7-69 shows the monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 configured with
two TMCs in the –48 V DC power supply scenario.
Figure 7-69 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with two TMCs
Table 7-48 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with two TMCs
S1 and S2 7.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable
Figure 7-70 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configured
with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A).
Figure 7-70 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with two
TMC11Hs (Ver.A)

DBS3900
Table 7-49 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with two TMC11Hs
(Ver.A)
S1 and S2 7.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H

(Ver.C) Cabinet
The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base station in 110 V
AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supply scenarios.

Scenario
Figure 7-71 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in the DBS3900 that serves as a
single- or dual-mode base station and is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H
(Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.
Figure 7-71 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the
configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Table 7-50 lists the monitoring signal cables.

DBS3900
Table 7-50 Monitoring signal cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration
of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable
S3 and S5 7.2.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between

the CMUA and the BBU
Figure 7-72 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the
configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.
configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

DBS3900
of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
S3 and S5 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUE

and the BBU
configuration of one APM30H (Ver. B)+one TMC11H (Ver. B)+two IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
configuration of +1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
of +1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

DBS3900

S6 Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded

CMUAs
configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
configuration of +1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
of +1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

DBS3900

and the BBU

CMUAs
configuration of two APM30Hs (Ver. B)+one TMC11H (Ver. B)+four IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
S1 S2 S3 S1 S2 S6
S1 S1
S5
S6 S4 S6 S4
of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts


CMUAs
configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.

DBS3900
configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

and the BBU

CMUAs
A triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs: BBU0 and BBU1. BBU0 is configured
in the basic cabinet, and BBU1 is configured in the extension cabinet. The monitoring devices
in all cabinets are connected to BBU0. Figure 7-77 shows the monitoring signal cable
connections in a triple-mode base station, using the scenario of BBUs in APM30Hs (Ver.B) as
an example.

DBS3900
Figure 7-77 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station in the
configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Table 7-56 Monitoring signal cables in a triple-mode base station in the configuration of 2
APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts


CMUAs

Figure 7-78 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 serves as a
single- or dual-mode base station and the BBUs are installed in two TMC11Hs (Ver.B).
Figure 7-78 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two
TMC11Hs (Ver. B)

DBS3900
Table 7-57 Monitoring signal cables in two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) configured for a single- or dual-
mode base station

Figure 7-79 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the BBUs of the DBS3900
are configured in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C).
Figure 7-79 Monitoring signal cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a
single- or dual-mode base station
Table 7-58 Monitoring signal cables in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a single- or dual-
mode base station

and the BBU
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)

The monitoring signal cable connections are different for distributed base stations in the 110 V
AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supply scenarios.

DBS3900

Scenario
Figure 7-80 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D).
Figure 7-80 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D)
Table 7-59 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D)
S1 and S4 PMU-CMUEA Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S3 7.2.16 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D).

DBS3900
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)

Cable
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D).

DBS3900
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)

Cable

CMUEAs
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D).

DBS3900
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)

Cable

CMUEAs
The following figure shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured
with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D.

DBS3900
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D
No. Description
S1 and S4 PMU 11A-CMUEA Monitoring Signal

Cable
S2 and S3 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable
The following figure shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured
with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700T.

DBS3900
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700T
No. Description
S1 PMU 11A-CMUEA Monitoring Signal

Cable
S4 PMU-CCU Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S3 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable
In a triple-mode base station, BBU 0 is installed in the primary APM30H (Ver.D). If this base
station is not configured with a TMC11H (Ver.D), BBU 1 is installed in the 2 U space below
BBU 0 in the primary APM30H (Ver.D). If this base station is configured with a TMC11H
(Ver.D), BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D). Figure 7-86 shows the monitoring signal
cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1
IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D).

DBS3900
Figure 7-86 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
IBBS200D (Ver.D)
Table 7-63 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
IBBS200D (Ver.D)

Cable
IBBS200T (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)
and BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, the monitoring signal cable connections in the base
station is the same as those in the same base station where BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D), as
shown by 2 in Figure 7-87.

DBS3900
IBBS200T (Ver.D)
IBBS200T (Ver.D)

Cable
Figure 7-88 shows the monitoring signal connections in a triple-mode base station configured
with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)

DBS3900
IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)
IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)

Cable

DBS3900
Figure 7-89 shows the monitoring signal connections in a triple-mode base station configured
with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)
IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)

DBS3900
IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)

Cable

configured with one TMC11H (Ver.D).
configured with one TMC11H (Ver.D)
configured with one TMC11H (Ver.D)
S1 7.2.16 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable
configured with one or two TMC11Hs (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.D) and BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space
below BBU 0, the monitoring signal cable connections in the base station is the same as those in the same
base station where BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D), as shown by 2 in Figure 7-81.

DBS3900
one or two TMC11Hs (Ver.D)
two TMC11Hs (Ver.D)

Cable
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB, OMB (Ver.C), IMB03, or
IFS06
The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base stations in 110 V
AC/220 V AC, and -48 V DC power supply scenario.
NOTE
l For details about the monitoring signal cable connections when the BBU is installed in the IMB03 or
IMB03+IFS06, see the DBS3900 Installation Guide and DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.
l When the DBS3900 uses the OMB or IMB03, the DBS3900 can be configured as a single- or dual-
mode base station. When the DBS3900 uses the IMB03+IFS06, the DBS3900 can be configured as a
single-, dual-, or triple-mode base station.

Scenario
with an AC OMB.

DBS3900
Figure 7-92 Monitoring signal cable connections for the AC OMB

S2 S2
S1
S4
S1 S3
S2
S3
S5 S5
S4
S2
Table 7-69 Monitoring signal cable connections for the AC OMB
S1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status

Sensor
S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan
S3 Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA
S4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC Surge

Protection Box
S5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC/DC

Power Equipment
with an AC OMB (Ver.C).

DBS3900
Figure 7-93 Monitoring signal cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C)
Table 7-70 Monitoring signal cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C)
S1 ELU Signal Cable
S2 Monitoring signal cable for the outer air

circulation fan
S3 Monitoring signal cable for the inner air

circulation fan

Sensor
S5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Surge

Protection Box
S6 7.2.13 HEUB-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable
S7 PMU 11A Monitoring Signal Cable
S8 Temperature monitoring signal cable

DBS3900

with a DC OMB.
Figure 7-94 DC OMB monitoring signal cable connections
Table 7-71 Monitoring signal cable connections for the DC OMB

Sensor
S3 Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA
with a DC OMB (Ver.C).

DBS3900
Figure 7-95 Monitoring signal cable connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C)
Table 7-72 Monitoring signal cable connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C)
S1 ELU Signal Cable

Assembly

Assembly

Sensor
S5 7.2.13 HEUB-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable
S6 Temperature monitoring signal cable
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet

This section describes the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 uses the
TP48600A cabinet.

DBS3900
When the DBS3900 is in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1

TMC11H (Ver.C), two BBUs are installed in the TP48600A cabinet. Figure 7-96 shows the
monitoring signal cable connections in this scenario. The monitoring signal cable connections
in the scenario with one IBBS700T are the same as those for the scenario with one IBBS700D.
This section describes only the monitoring signal cable connections for the scenario with one
IBBS700D.
NOTE
If only one BBU is installed in the TP48600A cabinet, only one CCU-BBU signal cable is required.
Figure 7-96 Monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1
TP48600A+1 IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Table 7-73 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.
Table 7-73 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1
TP48600A+1 IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
S1 and S2 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CCU

and the BBU
S3 Monitoring Signal Cable for the TMC11H
S4 Inter-CCU Signal Cable
7.1.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections

Two BBUs in a triple-mode base station can be cascaded to expand the mode supporting
capability, two BBUs in a single-mode base station can be cascaded to expand the service
processing capability of a single mode.

DBS3900
NOTE
When two BBUs in a base station are cascaded to achieve the GUL triple-mode, BBU0 is the root BBU,
and BBU1 is the leaf BBU.
UCIU+UMPT
In a triple-mode base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the UMPT in BBU1 to
achieve the GUL triple-mode. In a UMTS only base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected
to the UMPT in BBU1 to expand the UMTS service processing capacity. Any port from M0 to
M4 on the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU1, as shown
in Figure 7-97.
NOTE
In UCIU+UMPT mode, the UMPT must be configured as the main control board of BBU1. Table 7-74
lists the BBU configurations in UCIU+UMPT mode.
Table 7-74 BBU configurations
Scenario Description BBU0 BBU1
Triple-Mode Scenario GU L
GL U
GU UL
Single-Mode Scenario U U
Figure 7-97 Signal cable connection between the UCIU and the UMPT
WBBPf+WBBPf
In the UCIU+UMPT mode, the WBBPfs in the two BBUs can be connected to transmit baseband
data. As shown in Figure 7-97, the HEI ports on the WBBPfs in BBU0 and BBU1 are connected.
NOTE
In SRAN7.0, only the WBBPf in slot 2 or 3 of a BBU can be connected to the WBBPf in another BBU.

DBS3900
Figure 7-98 Signal cable connection between the WBBPfs
7.2 BBU3900 Cables

This section describes the exteriors, pin assignment for the wires, and connections of BBU3900
cables.
7.2.1 List of BBU3900 Cables

The BBU3900 cables consist of the PGND cables, BBU power cables, E1/T1 cables, E1/T1
surge protection transfer cables, FE/GE Ethernet cables, FE/GE surge protection transfer cables,
interconnection cables between FE electrical ports and between FE optical ports, CPRI fiber
optic cables, APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable, HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable,
CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable, monitoring signal cables for the EMUA, monitoring
signal cables for the PSU (DC/DC), in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), BBU alarm
signal cable, GPS clock signal cable, BBU cascading signal cable, co-site signal cable, and
maintenance adapter cable.
Table 7-75 lists the BBU3900 cables.
Table 7-75 Cable list
Cable One End The Other End
Connector Installation Connector Installation

Position Position
7.2.2 PGND Cable OT terminal Ground OT terminal External

(M4, 6 mm2 or terminal on (M8, 6 mm2 or ground bar
0.009 in.2) the BBU 0.009 in.2)
7.2.3 BBU Power 3V3 connector PWR port on OT terminal LOAD6 wiring
Cable the UPEU in (M4, 6 mm2 or terminal on the
the BBU 0.009 in.2) DCDU
3V3 connector PWR port on Tool-less EPS/LOAD1

the UPEU in female
the BBU connector
(pressfit type)

DBS3900

Position Position
7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable DB26 male E1/T1 port on Made onsite External
connector the UELP in according to transmission
the SLPU, or requirements equipment
E1/T1 port on
the UMPT,
GTMU,
WMPT, or
UTRP in the
BBU
7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge DB26 male E1/T1 port on DB25 INSIDE port
Protection Transfer connector the UMPT, connector on the UELP in
Cable GTMU, the SLPU
WMPT, or
UTRP in the
BBU
FE/GE Ethernet RJ45 connector FE0 port in the RJ45 External

Cable OUTSIDE connector transmission
part of the equipment
UFLP in the
SLPU
FE0 port on
the UMPT,
GTMU or
WMPT in the
BBU
FE/GE port on
the UTRP in
the BBU
FE/GE port on
the LMPT in
the BBU
7.2.7 FE Surge RJ45 connector FE0 port on RJ45 FE0 port in the
Protection Transfer the UMPT, connector INSIDE part of
Cable GTMU or the UFLP in the
WMPT in the SLPU
BBU
FE/GE port on
the UTRP in
the BBU

DBS3900

Position Position
7.2.8 RJ45 connector FE0 port on RJ45 FE0 port on the

Interconnection the WMPT in connector GTMU in the
Cable Between the the BBU BBU
FE Electrical Ports
7.2.9 LC connector FE1 port on LC connector FE1 port on the

Interconnection the WMPT in GTMU in the
Cable Between FE the BBU BBU
Optical Ports
7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber LC connector FE1 port on FC, SC, or LC External

Optic Cable the WMPT or connector transmission
GTMU in the equipment
BBU
7.2.11 CPRI Fiber DLC connector CPRI port on DLC CPRI_W port
Optic Cable the GTMU or connector on the RRU
WBBP in the
BBU
7.2.12 APMI-BBU RJ45 connector MON1 port on Twisted pair TX+, TX-, RX
Monitoring Signal the UPEU or +, or RX- port
Cable UEIU in the on the APMI
BBU
7.2.14 HEUA-BBU RJ45 connector MON port on RJ45 COM_IN port

Monitoring Signal the UPEU or connector on the HEUA
Cable UEIU in the
BBU
7.2.15 Monitoring RJ45 connector MON1 port on RJ45 CMUA/

Signal Cable the UPEU or connector COM_IN
Between the CMUA UEIU in the
and the BBU BBU
7.2.17 Monitoring RJ45 connector MON1 port on DB9 male RS485 port on
Signal Cable for the the UPEU in connector the EMUA
EMUA/EMUB the BBU
7.2.18 Monitoring RJ45 connector EXT_ALM0 Cord end ALM wiring

Signal Cable for the port on the terminal terminal on the
PSU (DC/DC) UPEU or PSU (DC/DC)
UEIU in the
BBU

DBS3900

Position Position
7.2.19 In-Position RJ45 connector EXT_ALM1 RJ45 PRESENT port

Signal Cable for the port on the connector on the PSU
PSU (DC/DC) UPEU or (DC/DC)
UEIU in the
BBU
7.2.20 BBU Alarm RJ45 connector EXT_ALM RJ45 External alarm

Cable port on the connector device
UPEU or
UEIU in the
BBU
7.2.21 GPS Clock SMA male GPS port on N-type female GPS surge
Signal Cable connector the LMPT or connector protector
USCU in the
BBU
7.2.22 BBU DLC connector M0 to M4 DLC CI port on the

interconnection ports on the connector UMPT in the
signal cable UCIU in the BBU
BBU
7.2.23 Cable DB15 male GCK port on MD36 or DGLUb on the

Between two connector the UCIU in DB15 male DCTB in the
Combined Base the BBU connector BTS3012
Stations
7.2.24 Adapter USB connector USB port on Ethernet Ethernet cable

Used for Local the UMPT in connector
Maintenance the BBU
7.2.2 PGND Cable

A PGND cable ensures proper grounding of a BBU.
Exterior
A PGND cable is green and yellow and has a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2 (0.0093 in.²). Both
ends of the cable are OT terminals. If the customer prepares the PGND cable, a copper-core
cable with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2 (0.0093 in.2) is recommended.
Figure 7-99 shows a PGND cable.

DBS3900
Figure 7-99 PGND cable for the BBU
(1) OT terminal (M4, 6 mm2, or 0.0093 in.²) (1) OT terminal (M8, 6 mm2, or 0.0093 in.²)
7.2.3 BBU Power Cable

BBU power cable feeds power from the power equipment into the BBU. The maximum length
of the BBU power cable is 20 m.
Cable Type
Table 7-76 lists the mapping relationships between the power device for the BBU and the type
of the BBU power cable.
Table 7-76 Type of the BBU power cable
Cable Power Connector on Connector on Exterior

Devices the Power the BBU Side
Device Side
BBU power PDU and OT terminal 3V3 connector The exterior is

cable DCDU-03B (M4, 6 mm2 or shown by 1 in
0.009 in.2) Figure 7-100.
EPS Tool-less The exterior is

EPU03A-03 or female shown by 2 in
EPU03A-05 connector Figure 7-100.
(pressfit type)
ETP48100-A1
EPU05A-03 or Tool-less The exterior is

EPU05A-05 female shown by 4 and
connector 6 in Figure
(pressfit type) 7-100.

DBS3900
Cable Power Connector on Connector on Exterior

Devices the Power the BBU Side
Device Side
AC/DC power H4 connector The BBU power

system cable has three
supplying connectors.
power to a BBU Among the three
installed in the connectors, two
OMB 3V3 connectors
are connected to
the BBU and
HEUA, and one
H4 connector is
connected to the
AC/DC power
system. An H4
connector is
shown by 5 n
Figure 7-100.
AC/DC power H4 connector The exterior is

system shown by 3 n
supplying Figure 7-100.
power to a BBU
installed in the
IMB03
Exterior
Figure 7-100 shows a BBU power cable.

DBS3900
Figure 7-100 BBU power cable
(1) 3V3 connector (2) OT terminal (M4, 6 mm2 or (3) Tool-less female connector
0.009 in.2) (pressfit type)
(4) Tool-less female connector (5) H4 connector

(pressfit type)
Cable Description
A power cable consists of two wires. Table 7-77 describes the pin assignment for the wires of
a power cable.
Table 7-77 BBU power cable description
Pin at the BBU Pin at the Power Wire Color in Wire Color in
Side Equipment Side Most Regions Other Regions
(UK)
A1 -48 V Blue Gray
A2 - - -
A3 GND Black Black
7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable

An E1/T1 cable transmits baseband signals from BBU to the external transmission equipment.
The maximum length of a E1/T1 cable is 50 m (164.04 ft).

DBS3900
Exterior
The E1/T1 cable is of three types: 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable, 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable, and
100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable.
One end of the E1 cable is a DB26 male connector. The connector at the other end of the cable
is prepared on site based on site requirements. Figure 7-101 shows an E1/T1 cable.
Figure 7-101 E1/T1 signal cable
(1) DB26 male connector
Table 7-78 lists different types of 75 ohm E1 coaxial cables.
Table 7-78 Different types of 75 ohm E1 coaxial cables
75 ohm E1 coaxial cable DB26 male connector L9 male connector
L9 female connector
SMB female connector
BNC male connector
SMZ male connector
SMZ female connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-79, Table 7-80, and Table 7-81 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1
cable.
Table 7-79 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable
Pin on the DB26 Type(1) Coaxial Unit No. Wire Label

Male Connector
X1.1 Tip 1 RX1+

DBS3900
Pin on the DB26 Type(1) Coaxial Unit No. Wire Label

Male Connector
X1.2 Ring RX1-
X1.3 Tip 3 RX2+
X1.4 Ring RX2-
X1.5 Tip 5 RX3+
X1.6 Ring RX3-
X1.7 Tip 7 RX4+
X1.8 Ring RX4-
X1.19 Tip 2 TX1+
X1.20 Ring TX1-
X1.21 Tip 4 TX2+
X1.22 Ring TX2-
X1.23 Tip 6 TX3+
X1.24 Ring TX3-
X1.25 Tip 8 TX4+
X1.26 Ring TX4-
NOTE
(1) "Tip" refers to a wire in the E1 coaxial cable and "Ring" refers to an external conductor of the cable.
Table 7-80 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable
Pin on the DB26 Wire Color Wire Type Wire Label

Male Connector
X.1 Blue Twisted pair RX1+
X.2 White RX1-
X.3 Orange Twisted pair RX2+
X.4 White RX2-
X.5 Green Twisted pair RX3+
X.6 White RX3-
X.7 Brown Twisted pair RX4+
X.8 White RX4-

DBS3900

Male Connector
X.19 Gray Twisted pair TX1+
X.20 White TX1-
X.21 Blue Twisted pair TX2+
X.22 Red TX2-
X.23 Orange Twisted pair TX3+
X.24 Red TX3-
X.25 Green Twisted pair TX4+
X.26 Red TX4-
Table 7-81 Pin assignment for the wires of the 100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable

Male Connector
X.1 Blue and white Twisted pair RX1+
X.2 White and blue RX1-
X.3 Orange and white Twisted pair RX2+
X.4 White and orange RX2-
X.5 Green and white Twisted pair RX3+
X.6 White and green RX3-
X.7 Brown and white Twisted pair RX4+
X.8 White and brown RX4-
X.19 Gray and white Twisted pair TX1+
X.20 White and gray TX1-
X.21 Blue and red Twisted pair TX2+
X.22 Red and blue TX2-
X.23 Orange and red Twisted pair TX3+
X.24 Red and orange TX3-
X.25 Green and red Twisted pair TX4+
X.26 Red and green TX4-

DBS3900
7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable

This section describes the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connecting the UELP to the
transmission board. This cable is optional. The length of an E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable
is 1.2 m (3.94 ft).
Exterior
The E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable has a DB26 male connector at one end and a DB25
male connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-102.
Figure 7-102 E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable
(1) DB25 male connector (2) DB26 male connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-82 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer
cable.
Table 7-82 Pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable
Pin on the DB25 Male Type Pin on the DB26 Male

Connector Connector
X1.20 Twisted pair cable X2.2
X1.19 X2.3
X1.3 X2.5
X1.21 X2.7
X1.5 X2.9
X1.23 X2.11

DBS3900
Pin on the DB25 Male Type Pin on the DB26 Male

Connector Connector
X1.7 X2.13
X1.2 X2.15
X1.26 X2.25
7.2.6 FE/GE Cable

The FE/GE cable connects the BBU to the transmission equipment through routing equipment.
It transmits baseband signals. The maximum length of the FE/GE cable is 50 m.
Exterior
The FE/GE cable is a shielded straight-through cable and has an RJ45 connector at each end, as
Figure 7-103 FE/GE cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Cable Description
Table 7-83 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable.
Table 7-83 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable
Pin on the RJ45 Color Type Pin on the RJ45 Connector at

Connector at One the Other End
End
X1.2 Orange Twisted pair X2.2
X1.1 White and X2.1

orange

DBS3900
Pin on the RJ45 Color Type Pin on the RJ45 Connector at

Connector at One the Other End
End
X1.6 Green Twisted pair X2.6
X1.3 White and X2.3

green
X1.4 Blue Twisted pair X2.4
X1.5 White and blue X2.5
X1.8 Brown Twisted pair X2.8
X1.7 White and X2.7

brown
7.2.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable

The FE surge protection transfer cable is used to connect the UFLP and the main control board.
It is an optional cable. The length of an FE surge protection transfer cable is 1 m (3.28 ft).
Exterior
The FE surge protection transfer cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure
7-104.
Figure 7-104 FE surge protection transfer cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-84 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable.
Table 7-84 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable
Pin on the RJ45 Wire Color Wire Type Pin on the RJ45 Connector
Connector

DBS3900
Pin on the RJ45 Wire Color Wire Type Pin on the RJ45 Connector
Connector
X1.1 White X2.1
X1.6 Green Twisted pair X2.6
X1.3 White X2.3
X1.5 White X2.5
X1.8 Brown Twisted pair X2.8
X1.7 White X2.7
7.2.8 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports

This cable connects the FE electrical ports on two main control boards to enable IP-based co-
transmission.
Exterior
The interconnection cable between the FE electrical ports has an RJ45 connector at each end,
Figure 7-105 Interconnection cable between FE electrical ports
(1) RJ45 connector
7.2.9 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports

This cable connects the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPT to achieve co-transmission
in IP mode.
Exterior
The interconnection cable between the FE optical ports has an LC connector at each end, as

DBS3900
Figure 7-106 Interconnection cable between FE optical ports
(1) LC connector
7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

An FE/GE fiber optic cable transmits optical signals between the BBU3900 and the transmission
equipment. This cable is optional. The maximum length of an FE/GE fiber optic cable is 20 m
(65.62 ft).
Exterior
The FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC connector,
or LC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-107, Figure 7-108, Figure 7-109.
Figure 7-107 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the FC and LC connectors)
Figure 7-108 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the SC and LC connectors)
Figure 7-109 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the LC connectors)

DBS3900
NOTICE
To connect a BBU3900 and a transmission device by using FE/GE optical fiber patch cords,
adhere to the following rules:
l The TX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the RX port on the transmission
equipment.
l The RX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the TX port on the transmission
equipment.
7.2.11 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable

CPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multimode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiber
optic cables. They transmit CPRI signals.
Multimode fiber optic cables connect the BBU and RRU or interconnect two RRUs. The
maximum length of the multimode fiber optic cable between the BBU and RRU is 150 m (492.12
ft) and the multimode fiber optic cable between two RRUs has a fixed length of 10 m (32.81 ft).
A single-mode fiber optic cable consists of the single-mode pigtail and trunk single-mode fiber
optic cable, and the single-mode pigtail and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable are
interconnected using the ODF. The maximum length of the single-mode pigtail is 20 m (65.62
ft) on BBU side and 70 m (229.66 ft) on RRU side.
NOTE
l The ODF and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable are provided by the customer and must comply with
the ITU-T G.652 standard.
l The ODF is an outdoor transfer box for fiber optic cables, which interconnects the single-mode pigtail
and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable.
l A multimode fiber optic cable and a single-mode fiber optic cable are connected to a multimode optical
module and a single-mode optical module, respectively.
Exterior
Multimode fiber optic cable: The multimode fiber optic cable has a DLC connector at each end,
Figure 7-110 Multimode fiber optic cable
(1) DLC connector (2) Breakout cable (3) Label on the breakout cable

DBS3900
NOTE
l When a multimode fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout cable on the BBU side
is 0.34 m (1.12 ft) and the breakout cable on the RRU side is 0.03 m (0.098 ft).
l When a multimode fiber optic cable connects two RRUs, the breakout cable on both sides is 0.03 m
(0.098 ft).
Figure 7-111 shows the connection of the multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an
RRU.
Figure 7-111 Connection of the multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU
(1) Multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU
Single-mode pigtail: The single-mode pigtail has a DLC connector at one end and an FC, LC,
or SC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-112.

DBS3900
Figure 7-112 Single-mode pigtail
(1) DLC connector (2) Breakout (3) Label on the (4) FC connector (5) LC connector (6) SC connector
cable breakout cable
NOTE
l When a single-mode pigtail connects a BBU and an ODF, the breakout cables on the BBU side and
ODF side are 0.34 m (1.12 ft) and 0.8 m (2.62 ft), respectively.
l When a single-mode pigtail connects an RRU and an ODF, the breakout cables on the RRU side and
ODF side are 0.03 m (0.098 ft) and 0.8 m (2.62 ft), respectively.
Figure 7-113 shows the connection of the single-mode pigtail.
Figure 7-113 Connection of the single-mode pigtail
(1) Single-mode pigtail between a BBU and an ODF (2) Single-mode pigtail between an RRU and an ODF

DBS3900
Selection Principles
The following table describes the principles for selecting CPRI fiber optic cables.
Table 7-85 Principles for selecting CPRI fiber optic cables
Remote Selection Principle Remarks

Distance
Less than or Multimode fiber optic cable Connects the BBU and RRU
equal to 100 m When it connects two RRUs, the distance
(328.08 ft) between the two RRUs must be equal to or
less than 10 m (32.81 ft).
Greater than Multimode fiber optic cable Connects the BBU and RRU
100 m (328.08
ft) and equal to Recommended: single-mode The single-mode pigtail at the RRU or BBU
or less than fiber optic cable (single-mode side is connected to the trunk single-mode
150 m (492.12 pigtail and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable using the ODF.
ft) fiber optic cable)
Greater than Single-mode fiber optic cable

150 m (492.12 (single-mode pigtail and trunk
ft) single-mode fiber optic cable)
Pin Assignment
Table 7-86 describes the labels on and recommended connections for the breakout cables of a
CPRI fiber optic cable.
Table 7-86 Labels on and recommended connections for the breakout cables of a CPRI fiber
optic cable
Label Installation Position
Multimode Fiber Multimode Fiber Single-Mode Pigtail

Optic Cable Optic Cable
Between a BBU Between Two
and an RRU RRUs
1A CPRI RX port on the CPRI RX port on RX port on the BBU or

RRU RRU 1 CPRI RX port on the
RRU
1B CPRI TX port on the CPRI TX port on TX port on the BBU or

RRU RRU 1 CPRI TX port on the
RRU
2A TX port on the BBU CPRI TX port on ODF

RRU 0

DBS3900
Label Installation Position
Multimode Fiber Multimode Fiber Single-Mode Pigtail

Optic Cable Optic Cable
Between a BBU Between Two
and an RRU RRUs
2B RX port on the BBU CPRI RX port on ODF

RRU 0
7.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable

The APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable is used to connect the APMI in the APM30 power
cabinet and the BBU. The cable transmits environment monitoring signals of the APM30 power
cabinet to the BBU.
Exterior
The APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable has an RJ45 connector at one end and four bare wires
at the other end. Figure 7-114 shows an APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable.
Figure 7-114 APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable
Pin Assignment
Table 7-87 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the APMI-BBU monitoring signal
cable.
Table 7-87 Pin assignment for the wires of the APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable
Pin on the Color Pins of X2, X3, Description Corresponding

RJ45 X4, and X5 Port on the
Connector APMI
X1.1 White X2 Twisted pair TX+
X1.2 Orange X3 TX-
X1.4 Blue X4 Twisted pair RX+
X1.5 White X5 RX-

DBS3900
7.2.13 HEUB-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable

The HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable transmits the monitoring information collected by the
HEUB to the BBU.
Exterior
Figure 7-115 shows an HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable.
Figure 7-115 HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Cable Description
Table 7-88 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the HEUB-BBU monitoring signal
cable.
Table 7-88 Pin assignment for the wires of the HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable
X1 End X2 End Color Type
X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
7.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable

The HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable transmits the monitoring information collected by the
HEUA to the BBU.

DBS3900
Exterior
Figure 7-116 shows an HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable.
Figure 7-116 HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-89 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the HEUA-BBU monitoring signal
cable.
Table 7-89 Pin assignment for the wires of the HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable
X1 End X2 End Wire Color Type
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
7.2.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU
The monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU connects the CMUA to the BBU
and transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUA to the BBU.
Exterior
Figure 7-117 shows the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU.

DBS3900
Figure 7-117 Monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-90 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between
the CMUA and the BBU.
Table 7-90 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and
the BBU
X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
7.2.16 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable

A CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable connects the CMUEA and the BBU and transmits the
monitoring signals collected by the CMUEA to the BBU.
Exterior
Figure 7-118 shows a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable.

DBS3900
Figure 7-118 Exterior of a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-91 describes the pin assignment for the wires of a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal
cable.
Table 7-91 Pin assignment for the wires of a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable
X1 End X2 End Wire Color Type
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
7.2.17 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMUA/EMUB

A monitoring signal cable for the EMUA/EMUB transmits monitoring signals from an EMUA/
EMUB to a BBU. This cable is delivered with the EMUA/EMUB.
Exterior
Figure 7-119 shows the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA/EMUB.

DBS3900
Figure 7-119 Monitoring signal cable for the EMUA/EMUB
(1) RJ45 connector (2) DB9 male connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-92 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the
EMUA/EMUB.
Table 7-92 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA/EMUB
Pin on the DB9 male Color Description Associated

RJ45 connector Port on the
Connector APMI
X1.1 X2.3 White Twisted pair TX+
X1.2 X2.7 Orange TX-
X1.5 X2.6 White Twisted pair RX-
X1.4 X2.2 Blue RX+
7.2.18 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the power
status of the PSUs and receive related alarms.
Exterior
Figure 7-120 shows the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).
Figure 7-120 Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

DBS3900
Pin Assignment
Table 7-93 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU
(DC/DC).
Table 7-93 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
X1 End Wire Color Type
X1.2 Blue Twisted pair
X1.1 White
X1.6 Orange Twisted pair
X1.3 White
X1.4 Green Twisted pair
X1.5 White
X1.8 Brown Twisted pair
X1.7 White
7.2.19 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-position
status of the PSU.
Exterior
Figure 7-121 shows the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).
Figure 7-121 In-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-94 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU
(DC/DC).

DBS3900
Table 7-94 Pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
7.2.20 BBU Alarm Cable

A BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from external alarm equipment to a BBU. The
maximum length of a BBU alarm cable is 20 m (65.62 ft).
Exterior
The BBU alarm cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-122. One RJ45
connector at one end, however, may be removed and an appropriate terminal may be added
according to the field requirements.
Figure 7-122 BBU alarm cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-95 shows the wire sequence of the BBU alarm cable.

DBS3900
Table 7-95 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable
BBU Pin on the Wire Wire Pin on the Description

Alarm RJ45 Color Type RJ45
Port Connecto Connecto
r r
EXT- X1.1 White and Twisted X2.1 Boolean input 4+

ALM1 orange pair
X1.2 Orange X2.2 Boolean input 4- (GND)
X1.3 White and Twisted X2.3 Boolean input 5+

green pair
X1.6 Green X2.6 Boolean input 5- (GND)

blue pair
X1.4 Blue X2.4 Boolean input 6- (GND)

brown pair
X1.8 Brown X2.8 Boolean input 7- (GND)
EXT- X1.1 White and Twisted X2.1 Boolean input 0+

ALM0 orange pair
X1.2 Orange X2.2 Boolean input 0+

(GND)

green pair
X1.6 Green X2.6 Boolean input 1- (GND)

blue pair
X1.4 Blue X2.4 Boolean input 2- (GND)

brown pair
X1.8 Brown X2.8 Boolean input 3- (GND)
7.2.21 GPS Clock Signal Cable

The GPS clock signal cable is used to transmit GPS clock signals from the GPS antenna system
to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU. This cable is
optional.

DBS3900
Exterior
The GPS clock signal cable has an SMA male connector at one end and an N-type female
connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-123.
Figure 7-123 GPS clock signal cable
(1) SMA male connector (2) N-type female connector
7.2.22 BBU interconnection signal cable

The BBU interconnection signal cable connects BBU0 and BBU1 to forward information
between the BBUs.
Cable Type
BBU interconnection signal cables are classified into different types based on their functions,
as listed in Table 7-96.
Table 7-96 Cable type
Cable Function Installation Position
BBU interconnection signal Forwards control and Connects the UMPT and the
cable synchronization information UCIU
from one BBU to another
Forwards baseband Interconnects two WBBPf

information from one BBU to boards
another
Exterior
l The BBU interconnection signal cable connecting UCIU to UMPT forwards control and
synchronization information from one BBU to another. When two BBUs are installed in
the same cabinet, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 2 meters long, as shown in Figure
7-124. When two BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the BBU interconnection signal cable
is 10 meters long, as shown in Figure 7-125.

DBS3900
Figure 7-124 BBU interconnection signal cable (1)
(1) DLC connector (2) Breakout cable
(1) DLC connector (2) Armoured cable (3) Breakout cable
l The BBU interconnection signal cable connecting WBBPf to WBBPf forwards baseband
information from one BBU to another, as shown in Figure 7-126. When two BBUs are
installed in the same cabinet, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 2 meters long. When
two BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 10 meters
long.
(1) QSFP connector (2) QSFP connector
7.2.23 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations

When a 3012 series base station and a 3900 series base station are installed side-by-side, the
cable between two combined base stations is used to connect the universal cascading interface
unit (UCIU) in the 3900 series base station and the cabinet top backplane for DTRU BTS (DCTB)
or DGLUb in the 3012 series base station.
Exterior
There are two types of cables that can be used to connect two combined base stations. Figure
7-127 shows the cable connected to the DCTB in the 3012 series base station.

DBS3900
Figure 7-127 Cable between two combined base stations (1)
(1) MD36 male connector (2) DB15 male connector
Figure 7-128 shows the cable connected to the DGLUb in the 3012 series base station.
Figure 7-128 Cable between two combined base stations (2)
(1) DB15 male connector
Pin Assignment
As shown in Figure 7-127, the cable has a DB15 male connector at one end and an MD36 male
connector at the other end. Table 7-97 lists the pin assignment for the wires of the cable.
Table 7-97 Pin assignment for the wires of the cable between two combined base stations (1)
Pin on the DB15 Pin on the MD36 Color Wire Type

Male Connector Male Connector
X1.2 X2.7 Blue
X1.4 X2.12 Orange
X1.10 X2.3 Green
X1.11 X2.16 Brown
X1.15 X2.28 Gray

DBS3900
Pin on the DB15 Pin on the MD36 Color Wire Type

X1.shell X2.shell Shield -
As shown in Figure 7-128, the cable has a DB15 male connector at both ends. Table 7-98 lists
the pin assignment for the wires of the cable.
Table 7-98 Pin assignment for the wires of the cable between two combined base stations (2)
Pin on the DB15 Pin on the DB15 Color Wire Type

X1.2 X2.2 Blue
X1.4 X2.4 Orange
X1.10 X2.10 Green
X1.11 X2.11 Brown
X1.15 X2.15 Gray
X1.shell X2.shell Shield -
7.2.24 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance

An adapter used for local maintenance connects the USB port on the UMPT to an Ethernet cable
during local maintenance.
Exterior
The adapter used for local maintenance has a USB connector at one end and an Ethernet
connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-129.

DBS3900
Figure 7-129 Adapter used for local maintenance
(1) USB connector (2) Ethernet connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-99 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance.
Table 7-99 Pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance
Pin of the USB Wire Color Wire Type Pin of the Ethernet
Connector Connector
X1.8 White X2.2
X1.5 White X2.6
X1.Shell - Shield X2.Shell


DBS3900 Hardware Description (14) (PDF) - en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DBS3900 Hardware Description (14) (PDF) - en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DBS3900

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Product Name Product Version

DBS3900 GSM V100R014C00

DBS3900 WCDMA V200R014C00

DBS3900 LTE V100R005C00

DBS3900 LTE TDD V100R005C00

This chapter describes the changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.

Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet

3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900

This chapter describes functional modules in the DBS3900.

4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks

5 DBS3900 Power System

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Calls attention to important information, best practices and

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900.......................................................................................56

Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks..................................................................................................165

5 DBS3900 Power System............................................................................................................273

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System..................................................................................................326

Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

7.1.1 Power Cable Connections........................................................................................................................................349

Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware

This chapter describes the changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.

Topic Change Description

3.1.6 UMPT Changed the signaling specifications of the

Topic Change Description

Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the

Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

Topic Change Description

3.1.5 WMPT Changed the description of the TST port.

3.1.14 UTRP Added the UTRPa.

Topic Change Description

3.1.10 LBBP Added the LBBPd4 used in LTE TDD

Issue 14 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2